Service Manual Hdi 3500

About This
Field Service Manual

4730-0036-03 Rev A
December 2002
HDI 3500
All rights reserved

Manual
Audience This manual supports the field service maintenance and repair of
Copyright © 2002 by Philips Medical Systems

the HDI 3500 Ultrasound System. The user of this document is a
qualified ultrasound electronics technician who has completed
training classes on the system and its peripherals.
Manual Format This manual is in Portable Document Format (PDF), for viewing
on a laptop computer with Acrobat Reader. A list of bookmarks
functions as an additional table of contents. Those bookmarks,
the table of contents, and cross-references use hypertext links to
provide access to the referenced information.
Conventions in The following conventions are used in this manual:

This Manual • Hypertext links are blue.
• All procedures are numbered. You must complete steps in the
sequence they are presented to ensure reliable results.
• Bulleted lists indicate general information about a function or
procedure. They do not imply a sequential procedure.
• Control names and menu items are spelled and capitalized in
the manual as they are on the system, and they appear in
bold text.
• Symbols appear as they appear on the system.
• An English system is assumed.
4730-0036-03 HDI 3500 Field Service Manual Page 2
Service Manual If you have questions about the service manual, or you discover an error in the manual,
Questions contact Philips Ultrasound Technical Publications:
or Comments • atl-bothell.techpubs@philips.com
• Technical Publications, MS 964, at the address below
Customer Various support locations around the world can provide customers with technical assis-
Assistance tance regarding the ultrasound system. Customers should contact the sales office where
they purchased the system or the nearest Philips Ultrasound office.
Philips Ultrasound
P.O. Box 3003
Bothell, WA 98041-3003
USA
(425) 487-7000 or (800) 426-2670
www.ultrasound.philips.com
“ATL”, “Advanced 3DI”, “Cineloop”, “Chroma”, “Color Power Angio”, “Entos”, “HDI,” “High Q”, “SonoCT”, and “Power
Harmonic” are registered trademarks of Philips Medical Systems.
“DVS”, “Flash Contrast”, “High Definition”, “Power Motion”, “Tissue Specific”, “Weblink”, and “XRes” are trademarks of
Philips Medical Systems.
Non-Philips Medical Systems product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Contents
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 1-1 HDI 3500 System (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 1-2 HDI 3500 System (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Scanheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Electrical and Video Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Temperature, Pressure, and Humidity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Physio Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 2-1 Physio ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 2-2 Physio High Level ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 2-3 Physio Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Table 2-4 Physio Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Table 2-5 Physio Phono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
System Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Contents
Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Equipment Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Safety Symbol Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 4-1 System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 4-2 Power Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 4-3 ACIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 4-4 Control Subsystem Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Acquisition Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 4-5 Acquisition Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 4-6 Channel Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Contents
Processing Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 4-7 Processing Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Display Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 4-8 Display Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Data Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 4-9 2D Black and White Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 4-10 PW Doppler, M-Mode and Color Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 4-11 CW and Static PW Doppler (TCD) Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 4-12 Internal/External VCR Frame Grab Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 4-13 External VCR Playback Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 4-14 External VCR Record Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Output Power Monitor Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 4-15 Power Monitor Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Bus Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 4-16 HDI 3500 Bus Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Control Subsystem Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Acquisition Subsystem Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Processing Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Display Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Figure 4-17 HDI 3500 System Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 4-18 Processing Subsystem Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 4-19 Display Subsystem Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 4-20 Acquisition Sub-System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Contents
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Pre-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Table 5-1 System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Table 5-2 System Crate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Electrical Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
➤ To verify a dedicated/isolated line: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 5-3 Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Image Management Network Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
➤ Perform the following steps before installing the NetLink option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Table 5-4 Network Cable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Materials and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Preliminary Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
➤ Inspect the shipping crate before unpacking the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Uncrating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Contents
➤ To uncrate the system from a wood crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 5-1 Wooden Crate Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 5-2 Unpacking Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 5-3 Monitor Latch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
➤ To uncrate the system from a corrugate crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 5-4 Corrugate Crate Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Figure 5-5 Corrugate Crate Unpacking Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
General Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
➤ To perform a general inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Mechanical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
➤ To perform a mechanical inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Electrical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
➤ To perform an electrical inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
VCR Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Table 5-5 Panasonic AGMD830/835 NTSC/PAL 120 V VCR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Table 5-6 VCR Programming Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Printer Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table 5-7 Sony UP-21MD Color Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 5-8 Sony UP-5600MD/UP-5600MDU Color Video Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Table 5-9 Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 5-10 Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Memory SW Menu Control Settings Setup 112
Table 5-11 Mitsubishi CP800 Color Video Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Table 5-12 Codonics NP-1660 Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Contents
Table 5-13 Sony UP-895MD B&W Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 5-14 P91W(A) Printer Front Panel Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table 5-15 P91W(A) Printer Rear Panel Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table 5-16 Sony UP890 Video Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 5-17 Aspect Multi-Image Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 5-18 System Setups for Video Printers and Aspect MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Final Inspection and Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
System Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Image Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
NetLink Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Host Table, Device Table, and Device Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Test Equipment and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
System Power Up and Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 6-1 Power-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Monitor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
User Interface Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Installation Defaults Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Contents
Patient Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Scanhead Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
2D Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2D Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
2D Color Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
2D Color Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Doppler Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Doppler Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
M-mode Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
M-mode Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Color Power Angio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Simultaneous Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
PW Doppler Noise Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Table 6-1 PW Doppler Noise Band Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Steered CW Doppler Noise Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Table 6-2 Steered CW Doppler Noise Band Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Table 6-3 CW Doppler Gain Control Settings for Noise Band Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
DiskLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Table 6-4 Image Management Printer Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
NetLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Contents
Table 6-5 ECG Simulator Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Multiplane TEE Scanhead Face Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
ISEM Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Table 6-6 ISEM Video Source Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Table 6-8 ISEM Date and Time Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Table 6-7 ISEM Video Calibration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
OEM Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Performance Test Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Power Supply Voltage Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Adjusting the Monitor to the Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
➤ To set monitor controls to the factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Adjusting the Monitor for Optimal Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
➤ To adjust the monitor for optimal viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
➤ To access FIMI monitor menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Adjusting Monitor Focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
➤ To adjust monitor focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 7-1 Monitor Control Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Trackball Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
➤ To adjust the tension on the (2100-1480-03) trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Image Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Optical Disk Drive Head Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Contents
Other Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
➤ To clean and adjust the trackball tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 8-1 Cleaning the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Core Bootup Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
➤ The core bootup fault isolation procedure is as follows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 9-1 Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Figure 9-2 Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Table 9-1 Normal Core Bootup and PCB LED Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Table 9-2 PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 9-3 PSM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS1, PS2, PS3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 9-4 ACIM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Alert Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
➤ To remove the alert from the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 9-5 Alert with Second Page of Information Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
User Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Table 9-3 User Event Log Language Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 9-6 User Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Formatting Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
➤ To format a blank optical disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Backing Up Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
➤ To copy Tissue Specific Presets to the optical disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 9-7 Formatting Optical Disk/Copying Tissue Specific Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Contents
User Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
➤ To access the user diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 9-8 User Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Comprehensive Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
➤ To invoke the Comprehensive Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Check Installed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Show Bootup Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Show Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Show Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Table 9-4 Machine Options/Software Build Compatibility Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Backing-up Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Video Test Patterns Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Table 9-5 Video Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Remote Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Card Cage PCBs and Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
➤ To remove the IIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
➤ To insert the IIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
➤ To install the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
➤ To remove the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Control Panel PCBs and On/Standby Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
➤ To remove the Control Panel PCBs and On/Standby switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Figure 10-1 Control Panel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Contents
Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
➤ To replace the trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Internal OEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
➤ To install an Internal OEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 10-2 OEM Orientation on OEM Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 10-3 Internal OEM Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Self-Adhesive Rubber Handle Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
➤ To remove the Scanhead Select Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
➤ To install the Scanhead Select Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 10-4 S/HSEL Installation Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 10-5 Monitor Cable Clamp Installation (Control Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 10-6 Monitor RFI Cable Clamp Installation (Right Side Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Transceiver Retaining Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Transceiver Support Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
➤ To install a transceiver support bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 10-7 Transceiver Support Bracket Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 10-8 Template Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 10-9 Installing Transceiver Support Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
System Cabling and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 11-1 Connector Locations, Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 11-2 Connector Locations, Rear Panel (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 11-3 Connector Locations, Rear Panel (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Contents
Figure 11-4 AC Input Module (ACIM) Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 11-5 Centerplane Connector and Card Edge Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 11-6 RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Table 11-1 RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 11-7 OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Table 11-2 OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 11-8 Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Table 11-3 Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 11-9 Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Table 11-4 Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 11-10 AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input (P/N 2275-0327-XX) . . . . . . 249
Table 11-5 AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input (P/N 2275-0327-XX) . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 11-11 AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Table 11-6 AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 11-12 AAM Video Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Table 11-7 AAM Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 11-13 AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Table 11-8 AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 11-14 VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Table 11-9 VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 11-15 VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Table 11-10 VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Contents
Figure 11-16 Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Table 11-11 Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 11-17 Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 261
Table 11-12 Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 11-18 B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Table 11-13 B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 11-19 Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N 3500-1541-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 265
Table 11-14 Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N 3500-1541-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 11-20 Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB (P/N 3500-2644-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 267
Table 11-15 Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB (P/N 3500-2644-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 11-21 Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Table 11-16 Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Figure 11-22 Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Table 11-17 Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 11-23 DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Table 11-18 DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 11-24 Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Table 11-19 Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 11-25 Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Table 11-20 Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 11-26 Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Table 11-21 Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 11-27 LED Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0393-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Contents
Figure 11-28 On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Table 11-22 On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 11-29 Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Table 11-23 Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 11-30 Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2752-XX) . . . . . . . . . 283
Table 11-24 Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2752-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 283
Figure 11-31 UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX) . . . . . . . . . 284
Table 11-25 UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 11-32 IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Table 11-26 IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 11-33 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Table 11-27 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P1-1 to P1-2 (P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 292
Table 11-28 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P2-1 to P2-2 (P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 293
Table 11-29 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly Jumper, P1-1 to P2-1(P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . 294
Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 11-34 Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Table 11-30 Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 11-35 Fan Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1514-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Figure 11-36 Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Table 11-31 Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Figure 11-37 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Table 11-32 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 11-38 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 230 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Contents
Table 11-33 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 230 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Monitor Internal Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
System Interconnect Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Cable Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Table 11-34 HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Table 11-35 HDI 3500 Power Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 11-39 Monitor Internal Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 11-40 Notes for HDI 3500 Signal/Power Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 11-41 HDI 3500 System Signal Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 11-42 HDI 3500 System Power Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
150.XX Software Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Features Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Features Not Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
150.23 (8.5.1 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
150.24 (8.5.2 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
151.06 (8.5.3 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
151.09 (8.5.4 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
151.11 (8.5.5 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
151.12 (8.5.6 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Contents
PCB Locations and Replacement Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 13-1 Primary System PCB Names and Locations (Front Card Cage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Figure 13-2 Primary System PCB Names and Locations (Rear Card Cage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Usage Rules for PROM Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Usage Rules for Jumper and PROM Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Table 13-1 System Software Level Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Repairing DDEA Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Table 13-2 DDEA Replaceable Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Hard Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
➤ To replace a system hard drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Table 13-3 Hard Drive Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Drive Jumper and Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Table 13-4 Hard Drive Jumper/LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Figure 13-3 IBM Hard Drive SCSI Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Table 13-5 Magneto-Optical Drive Switch/Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Figure 13-4 MO Drive SCSI Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Table 13-6 A4F FEC PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Table 13-7 A4F FEC PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Figure 13-5 FEC Jumper and PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Table 13-8 A3B PCM PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Table 13-9 A3B PCM PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Figure 13-6 PCM Jumper and PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Table 13-10 A5B PSP1 PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Contents
Table 13-11 A5B PSP1 PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Figure 13-7 PSP1 Jumper and PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Table 13-12 A6B CPU PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Table 13-13 A6B CPU PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 13-8 CPU PROM Locations (3500-2677-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Table 13-14 A9B ADAPTR PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Table 13-15 A9B ADAPTR PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Figure 13-9 ADAPTR PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Table 13-16 A11B SSP PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Table 13-17 A11B SSP PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Figure 13-10 SSP PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Table 13-18 A13B AIFOM PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Table 13-19 A13B AIFOM PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 13-11 AIFOM PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Parts Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
How to Find a Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
➤ How to use the figures and tables in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Parts Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 14-1 HDI 3500 Main Components and Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 14-2 HDI 3500 System, External Small Parts (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 14-3 HDI 3500 System, External Small Parts (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 14-4 Cable Drape Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Contents
Figure 14-5 HDI 3500 System, Front (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 14-6 HDI 3500 System, Front (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Figure 14-7 Front Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 14-8 HDI 3500 System, Rear (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Figure 14-9 HDI 3500 System, Rear (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Figure 14-10 Rear Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 14-11 Rear Cover Detail (Transceiver Bracket) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 14-12 24VDC Fans (Rear Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Figure 14-13 Caster Assembly, Swivel Type (Front and Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Figure 14-14 System Casters, Axle Type (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Figure 14-15 Card Cage, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Figure 14-16 DDEA Module Assembly (Without ECG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Figure 14-17 DDEA Module Assembly (Physio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 14-18 DDEA Module Assembly (Without MO Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 14-19 DDEA Module Assembly (Without ECG, MO Drive and Physio) . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Figure 14-20 MO Drive (DDEA Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Figure 14-21 Non MO Drive Connector Bracket (DDEA Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Figure 14-22 Card Cage, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 14-23 AC Input Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 14-24 Power Transformer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Figure 14-25 OEM Transformer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Figure 14-26 Video Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Figure 14-27 Video Monitor Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Contents
Figure 14-28 Video Monitor Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Figure 14-29 Microphone Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Figure 14-30 Monitor Tilt Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Figure 14-31 Monitor Tilt Base Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Figure 14-32 VCR Support (Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Figure 14-33 Control Panel (Lock Bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Figure 14-34 Control Panel (Upper and Lower UIF Assemblies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Figure 14-35 Command Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Figure 14-36 Cart Handle (Cart Weldment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 14-37 Cable Clamp Assembly (Command Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Figure 14-38 Hand Controller Connector Bracket (Command Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Figure 14-39 Integrated Stress Echo Module and Accessories (ISEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Figure 14-40 OEM Remote Tray Assembly (ISEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Figure 14-41 Tray Rod Detent (ISEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Figure 14-42 System Labels (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Table 14-1 HDI 3500 System Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Table 14-2 HDI 3500 System Accessories Parts List (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Table 14-3 Peripheral Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Contents
Scanheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Scanheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Table 15-1 Scanhead Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Table 15-2 Scanhead Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Table 15-3 Scanhead Biopsy Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Table 15-4 Scanhead Clinical Options and TSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Table 15-5 PW Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Table 15-6 CW Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
General Information: Introduction
1 General Information
Introduction The HDI 3500 system is a general-purpose, mobile, software-controlled, diagnostic ultra-
sound system (Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2). Its function is to acquire, process, and display
ultrasound data.
The operator can measure anatomical structures and generate reports for health care
professionals. The primary users are physicians and sonographers in clinics and hospital
departments that provide diagnostic ultrasound services.
The system has a basic set of imaging modes and measurement tools. There also are
modes and measurement tools that are only available when a specific mode or analysis
package is purchased and enabled for customer use. Upgrade security is controlled
through the use of system-specific passwords and software.
VCR
Control panels
Upper user interface Monitor
Lower user interface
Optical disk drive Peripheral bay
Card cage and

scanhead receptacles
Footswitch Frame
Figure 1-1 HDI 3500 System (Front)

1
2
120 v~
3
60 Hz4
1450 VA
5
6
7
ON
OFF
Figure 1-2 HDI 3500 System (Rear)
Scanheads Refer to Section 15, “Scanheads” for a list of the scanheads and applications.
Physical Frame
Description The frame provides the primary structural support for the system. It has a one-piece
weldment. Front and rear casters are swivel mounted. Front casters have brake locks. All
casters have integral shock mounts. The frame provides the mounting base and swivel
mechanism for the monitor module.
Card Cage
The removable card cage slides into the frame and is secured with screws. It incorpo-
rates a centerplane with modules inserted from the front and rear. Rear mounted fans
provide filtered forced-air cooling.
Ten slots are dedicated with appropriate shielding for beamformer boards. External con-
nections are provided through connectors mounted on brackets attached directly to the
card cage modules to eliminate cabling to remote connectors. All PCBs and other mod-
ules in the card cage are slide-in modules with card-edge connectors, switches, and
LEDs, as necessary.
Peripheral Bay
Peripherals are installed into the cart with their control panels accessible to the operator.
PRINT and RECORD on the system control panel control the peripherals. In addition,
VCR CTRL is used to display the following VCR softkeys: PLAY, PAUSE, STOP, FF, and
REWIND.
The open peripheral bay will accept a variety of peripherals. Peripherals are mounted by
one or more straps on a universal adapter plate. The plate can easily be modified or
replaced to accommodate future peripherals. A VCR mounts on top of the monitor or in
the peripheral bay.
Control Panels
Control panel controls are located on the upper and lower user interface assemblies.
Operator controls consist of a full-size keyboard, a trackball and an array of pushbuttons,
toggle switches, slidepots, and rotary controls. Pressing certain switches displays menus
on the video screen. The trackball is then used to select from the menus. Slidepots con-
trol TGC. Rotary controls are used for gain control.
Included on the control module assembly are scanhead holders, storage trays at the
rear, and the handle used to move the system. The keyboard wrist rest also serves as an
ESD ground for the operator.
Monitor
The monitor assembly includes a single 15-inch, 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz non-interlaced mon-
itor, monitor enclosure, and mounting for the VCR. VCR and monitor are removable for
mobile systems. The monitor is mounted on a swivel base that is mounted on the frame.
Video resolution is 512 x 640 pixels in NTSC format and 512 x 768 pixels in PAL format.
The monitor senses the input video format and will also display interlaced video with hor-
izontal sync frequencies, nominally 15.7 kHz, with vertical sync signal frequencies
between 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Cables
Internal power cables are routed from the AC Input Module (ACIM) through the right rear
of the system (with the observer facing the rear of the system) to the OEM or module
requiring power. Internal signal cables are routed from the Internal Interface Module (IIM)
through the left rear of the system to each OEM or the monitor. No cables are connected
to the centerplane. Refer to Section 11, “Cabling”, for more information.
General Information: System Specifications
Supplies and System-specific and general-purpose ultrasound supplies and accessories, including
Accessories scanhead biopsy guides, are available from CIVCO Medical Instruments at the
addresses and numbers below. Supplies and accessories are no longer available from
Philips Ultrasound.
CIVCO Medical Instruments
102 First St. South
Kalona, IA 52247-9589
Phone: (800) 445-6741, Ex. 1 for Customer Service (USA)

(319) 656-4447 (International)
Fax: (877) 329-2482 (USA)
(319) 656-4451 (International)
E-mail: info@civcomedical.com
Internet: www.ultrasoundsupplies.com
System See Section 2, “Specifications”, and Section 6, “Performance Tests” for size, weight, and
Specifications environmental specifications. Also see Section 15, “Scanheads” for scanhead frequency
and application specifications.
Specifications: System Specifications
2 Specifications
System
Specifications
Physical • Width: 72.0 cm (28.35 in)
Dimensions • Height: 157.5 cm (62.0 in) with VCR
142.2 cm (56.0 in) without VCR
122 cm (48.0 in) when monitor is removed for transport
• Depth: 110.4 cm (43.45 in)
• Weight: 172-200 kg (380-440 lbs), depending on the peripherals installed
Electrical and • Power:

Video - 100-120 Vac, (V∼), 50 Hz, 1450 VA
Parameters - 120 Vac, (V∼), 60 Hz, 1450 VA
- 230 Vac, (V∼), 50 Hz, 1450 VA
- 230 Vac, (V∼), 60 Hz, 1450 VA
- NTSC/PAL video formats
- Integral AC line conditioner
- Power consumption: 800 W; with optional OEMs, 1150 W
- Refer to Table 5-3 for power specifications required during system installations.
Temperature, • Storage and Shipping
Pressure, and - High: 65° C Low: -35° C
Humidity Limits - All at 1060 hPa to 303 hPa (1.05 ATM to 0.3 ATM)
- 15% to 95% relative humidity
• Operating Environment
- High: 40° C Low: 16° C
- All at 1060 hPa to 700 hPa (1.05 ATM to 0.7 ATM)
- 15% to 95% relative humidity
- 3620 BTU/Hr at 1060 W (varies with usage, refer to Table 5-3)
Physio
Performance Table 2-1 Physio ECG
Lower Frequency Cut-off 0.3 Hz ± 0.03 Hz
Upper Frequency Cut-off > 25 Hz ± 2.5 Hz
Nominal Input Amplitude 1 mVp-p
Minimum Sensitivity 5 X 10-3 V
Table 2-2 Physio High Level ECG
Upper Frequency Cut-off > 27 Hz ± 2.7 Hz
Gain Range 21 dB ± 1 dB
Table 2-3 Physio Pulse
Transducer Type Fukuda Denshi Other
Lower Frequency 0.5 Hz ± 0.1 Hz 0.5 Hz ± 0.1 Hz
Cut-off
Upper Frequency > 50 Hz > 50 Hz
Cut-off
Gain Range 45 dB ± 1 dB 35.5 dB ± 1 dB
Minimum Sensitivity 50 X 10- 6V 2 X 10-3 V
Table 2-4 Physio Auxiliary
Upper Frequency Cut-off > 800 Hz
Gain Range 28.5 dB ± 1 dB
Table 2-5 Physio Phono
Gain Range Minimum Sensitivity
Low Upper
Phono Frequency Frequency Fukuda Fukuda
Filter Cut-off Cut-off Denshi Other Denshi Other
Off 28 ± 2.8 Hz 810 ± 81 Hz 51 ± 1 dB 56 ± 1dB 50 X 10-6V 50 X 10-6 V
Low 78 ± 7.8 Hz 385 ± 38.5 Hz 51 ± 1 dB 56 ± 1dB 15 X 10-6V 15 X 10-6 V
Medium 90 ± 9.0 Hz 620 ± 62 Hz 51 ± 1 dB 56 ± 1dB 15 X 10-6V 15 X 10-6 V
High 180 ± 18 Hz 800 ± 80 Hz 51 ± 1 dB 56 ± 1dB 10 X 10-6V 10 X 10-6 V
Specifications: System Installation Specifications
Doppler Refer to Table 15-5 and Table 15-6. Customers can refer to HDI 3500 Ultrasound System
Maximum Scanheads and Safety Manual.
Measurable
Velocities
(MMV)
System System installation specifications include environmental requirements, uncrated and
Installation crated dimensions, and power requirements. Refer to Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3
for these specifications.
Specifications
Safety • Classification:
Requirements - Class I equipment with Type B, BF, and CF applied parts
- Ordinary Equipment
- Non-AP/APG
• Electromechanical safety standards met:
- CSA C22.2 No. 601.1, Canadian Standards Association, Medical Electrical Equip-
ment
- EN 60601-1, Second Edition, including Amendments 1 and 2, European Norm,
Medical Electrical Equipment
- EN 60601-1-2, First Edition, European Norm, Collateral Standard, Electromag-
netic Compatibility
- IEC 1157:1992, International Electrotechnical Commission, Requirements for the
declaration of the acoustic output of medical diagnostic ultrasonic equipment
- JIS T-1000 Series, Japanese Industrial Standard, Medical Electrical Equipment
Specifications: Safety Requirements
- UL 2601-1, Underwriters Laboratories, Medical Electrical Equipment
• Agency approvals:
- Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
- Japanese Ministry of Health and Welfare
- ISO 9001, EN46001 Quality Assurance Standard; Certificate #FM28256 issued
by the British Standards Institution (BSI) for Quality Systems
- CE marked to the European Community Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC
per Annex II, as a Class IIa device, in accordance with Annex IX
(BSI Certificate #0604)
Specifications: Safety Requirements
Safety: Safety Information
3 Safety
Safety
Information
Introduction Please read this information before using the ultrasound system. It applies to the
ultrasound system, scanheads, recording devices, and any optional equipment.
This device is intended for use by, or by the order of, and under the supervision of a
licensed physician qualified to direct the use of the device.
In this manual, a WARNING describes precautions necessary to prevent injury or loss of
life.
In this manual, a CAUTION describes precautions necessary to protect the equipment.
Electrical Safety This equipment has been Certified by a recognized third-party testing agency as a
Class I device with Type B non-isolated and Type BF and Type CF isolated
patient-applied parts. For maximum safety, observe the following warnings and cautions:
WARNINGS • Before connecting and applying power, all ACIM (power input panel) mounting screws
must be in place and properly secured to complete the system ground path.
• Shock hazards may exist if this system is not properly grounded. Protection against
electrical shock is provided by grounding the chassis with a 3-wire cable and plug.
The system must be plugged into a hospital-grade three-hole outlet. The grounding
wire must not be removed or defeated.
WARNINGS • Do not remove the protective covers on the system; hazardous voltages are present
inside. Cabinet panels must be in place while the system is in use. All internal adjust-
ments and replacements must be made by a qualified Field Service Engineer.
• Do not operate this system in the presence of flammable gases or anesthetics. Explo-
sion can result.
• Always inspect the scanhead or pencil probe face, housing, and cable before use. Do
not use the scanhead or pencil probe if the face is cracked, chipped, or torn, the
housing is damaged, or the cable is abraded.
• Always disconnect the system from the wall outlet prior to cleaning the system.
• Connection of optional devices not supplied by Philips Ultrasound could result in elec-
trical shock. When such optional devices are connected to your ultrasound system,
ensure that the total system chassis risk current does not exceed 300 µA for 120 Vac
and 500 µA for 230 Vac systems.
• In general, only the area of the scanhead acoustic window is watertight. Except
where specified in specific scanhead cleaning instructions, do not immerse the
remainder of a scanhead in any liquid.
CAUTIONS • Always place the system ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY for five to ten seconds
before setting the system I/O circuit breaker to OFF.
• Always wait five to ten seconds after placing the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY
before placing the switch to ON. A power-down sequence, similar to the initialization
that occurs when power is first turned on, saves certain operating parameters and
turns off power supplies in a sequential order. Review the power subsystem discus-
sion in Section 4, “Theory of Operation”.
• Always verify the power cord voltage label matches the voltage on the device before
plugging in the power cord. On 230 Volt systems VCR power is 230 Volts but the
monitor is 120 Volts. Applying 230 Volts to the monitor will destroy it.
• This equipment contains components that are electrostatic sensitive. Proper static
procedures, protection, and equipment must be used prior to opening and during
handling of this equipment. Failure to use ESD procedures will cause damage to
these components. Such damage to components is not covered by Philips Ultrasound
warranties.
Mechanical
Safety
WARNING Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can amount to a significant voltage. The following precau-
tions can reduce ESD: antistatic spray on carpets; antistatic spray on linoleum; antistatic
mats; use of a ground wire connection between the system and the patient table or bed;
use of the ESD pads on the system handles and the wrist support of the system key-
board.
WARNINGS • Be aware of the casters, especially when moving the system. The system can weigh
200 kg (440 pounds), depending upon configuration, and it could cause injury to you
or others if it rolls over feet or into shins.
• Push the system, instead of pulling it, and use special caution when going up or down
ramps.
• Position external hardcopy devices away from the system. Ensure they are secure.
Do not stack them on the system.
• During normal operation, the system power transformer (located behind the rear
cover) is hot to the touch. Use care when working near the transformer to avoid being
burned.
Equipment
Protection
CAUTIONS • Excessive bending or twisting of a scanhead or pencil probe cable may cause failure
or intermittent operation of the system.
• Ensure scanhead cables are secure. Use the cable management system to ensure
the scanhead cables are protected from damage.
• Do not sterilize a scanhead using gas or heat methods. Never autoclave a scanhead
or expose it to temperatures exceeding 55° C (131° F). These sterilization methods
may permanently damage the scanhead. Only some scanheads can be sterilized. For
information on disinfection and sterilization, see the Using Disinfectants and Gels
manual, part number 4700-0249-XX.
CAUTIONS • Inspect the system power cord and plug on a regular basis. Ensure they are not dam-
aged in any way.
• The power supplies continue to operate when the system is in standby. Ensure the
circuit breaker is OFF before unplugging the system from the wall outlet.
• For optimal performance, the ultrasound system should be connected to a 15- amp
dedicated circuit with an isolated ground.
Safety: Safety Symbol Definitions
Safety The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) has established a set of symbols to
Symbol classify electrical connections and warn of potential hazards on medical electronic equip-
ment.
Definitions
These symbols are used on the outside of the system:
Non-isolated patient connection (Type B). Protection against electrical shock
is provided by connection of chassis to the safety ground.
Isolated patient connection (Type BF).
Isolated patient connection for applied parts in direct contact with major
vessels (Type CF).
I and O on the circuit breaker represent ON and OFF.
/
On the power switch, represents ON and STANDBY.
/
This symbol identifies a safety note. Ensure you understand the function of
this control before using it. Refer to the appropriate section in the Reference
Manual for an explanation of the control.
Drip-proof appliance (scanhead, pencil probe, or footswitch). This instrument
may be safely handled in a damp environment.
IPX-1
Water-proof appliance (scanheads only). This instrument may be safely

immersed.
IPX-7
Safety: Safety Tests
Identifies equipotential ground (located next to ground stud on the rear

panel).
The following symbols are also used on the system:

Identifies high-voltage components operating above 750 Vac (RMS) or 750
Vdc.
Identifies the point where the system safety ground is fastened to the chassis.
Safety Tests
CAUTION Always use correct electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when any system covers
have been removed. Refer to Section 3 of the General Field Service Manual, P/N
4720-0219-XX.
Theory of Operation: Introduction
4 Theory of Operation
Introduction This section describes the electronics of the system and how the echo data flows
through it. Also included are descriptions of the control architecture and the software
architecture.
Operating The software operating system is supported by X-Windows software. X-Windows is an

System industry-standard software system that allows the development of graphical user inter-
faces, which consist of windows, graphics, and displayed text.
X-Windows is made up of a server and a client. The server resides on the PCM, and the
client resides on the CPU.
• The server completely controls all input and output devices
• The client communicates with the server using Ethernet, an asynchronous
byte-stream protocol
• CPU software controls all ultrasound functions
Partitioning The electronics of the system can be divided into five basic functional subsystems
(Figure 4-1). Each subsystem contains several modules that perform specific functions
within the subsystem.
Theory of Operation: Partitioning
System Block
Diagram
Control Power All modules
SCIP Bus
Monitor, VCR,
Acquisition Processing Display
peripherals
RF Bus Image Bus

Network Network
and
Analysis
Figure 4-1 System Block Diagram

The HDI 3500 Subsystems consists of:
• Power Subsystem
• Control Subsystem
• Acquisition Subsystem
• Processing Subsystem
• Display Subsystem
Power The Power Subsystem (Figure 4-2) includes AC Input Module (ACIM) and Power Supply
Subsystem Module (PSM). The power subsystem is monitored and controlled by a microprocessor in
the Front End Controller PCB (FEC) using the Front End Processor (FEP) bus.
System power is not field-configurable. Four versions of the ACIM provide 120 Vac/60
Hz, 100-120 Vac/50 Hz (for Japanese market), 230 Vac/50 Hz, and 230 Vac/60 Hz con-
figurations.
The Power Subsystem also includes a shielded line cord, On/Off circuit breaker, an isola-
tion transformer, a linear transformer, resonant filter capacitors, manual ON/STANDBY
switch (on user interface), software-controlled power ON/STANDBY switch (controlled by
CPU), and overload protection in the power supply (watchdog circuitry on FEC).
There are no power supply adjustments. The subsystem converts high-voltage AC into
DC voltages, then buses these DC voltages over the centerplane to the modules that
require them. Status LEDs on the ACIM and PSM are covered in Section 9, “Trouble-
shooting”. Refer to “Output Power Monitor Theory” on page 66 for Output Power Monitor
theory.
The voltages supplied by the PSM are:
• +5 Vdc (Vicor module voltage for logic circuits on all PCBs in Centerplane)
• -5.2 Vdc (Used in ASICs on CPU, DDEA, AIFOM, SSP, ADAPTR, PSP1, PCM, PIM)
• ±6 Vdc (Used in clock and other analog circuits on all PCBs in Centerplane)
• ±15 Vdc (Used in amplifier and other analog IC circuit on beamformer boards)
• ±12 Vdc (Used for analog circuitry on all PCBs in Centerplane, DDEA uses +12 V for
HD and MO drive voltage)
• +12 to +24 Vdc (variable for fans)
• ±115 Vdc (0 to +HV and 0 to -HV for variable pulsers)
FEP bus
Power Distribution Group

ACIM (PS4) On/Standby -5.2 Vdc
±12 Vdc
Circuit 1200 VA Fuse Diode Environ. bus
xfmr 250 V/12 A bridge +12 to +24 Vdc fans (via ACIM)
breaker
AC 155 Vac
+HVDC
power
input FEC power failure
Power
PIM
OEM relay AIM supply
OEM (controlled by and module FEC HV DC OK (pulser enable)
xfmr on/standby AIFOM
switch) PSM
temp (PS1) Sys init*
sensors
(PS2)
(PS3) HV EN
3.3V (not currently used)
+5 Vdc
OEM ±6 Vdc
OEM Temp ±80 Vdc (SH multiplex circuits)
Monitor, 115 V ± 10% Sensor ±15 Vdc
±15 to -115 Vdc pulser/mux
(0 to + HV)
Figure 4-2 Power Subsystem
Power Subsystem Operation

The Power Subsystem operates in three modes:
• Power-Up
Brief initialization period after system circuit breaker is turned on.
• STANDBY
WARNING HVDC is present on the Centerplane in STANDBY.
ON/STANDBY switch remains in STANDBY. Power supplies on: no power to card

cage or internal OEMs, system INIT* set low.
• ON
ON/STANDBY switch set to ON. All power rails turned on, system initialized, no faults
detected, OEM voltages enabled.
Refer to paragraph “Output Power Monitor Theory” on page 66 for information about the
watchdog circuits mentioned below.
Power-Up Mode - occurs when the system circuit breaker is turned on. During
power-on:
• PSM powers a small +5 V supply (not the Vicor output), which enables ON/STANDBY
circuitry in the PSM.
• All Power Subsystem outputs are held disabled.
• PSM resets latches to enable the Vicor power supplies.
• The system is placed in STANDBY mode.
STANDBY to On Mode - PSM monitors the state of the ON/STANDBY switch on the UIF.
When the ON/STANDBY switch is set to ON, the following occurs:
• +5 V Vicor logic power is applied to card cage, 6 V is applied to clocks.
• System INIT* set to high and PCBs begin to initialize.
• OEM power is enabled.
• All PCBs, including the FEC initialize and other PSM voltages (like 12 V for HD and
MO drive), are applied as needed.
• FEC monitors card cage temperature via thermistor circuitry in the PSM, AIFOM,
PIM, and AIM PCBs. FEC controls PSM output of +12 V to +24 V to adjust fan veloc-
ity and card cage air flow to maintain a safe operating temperature. Fan speed is min-
imum up to a card cage temperature of 131° F (55° C). At minimum speed the fan
voltage is minimum or about 12 to 18 V.
• FEC interprets the voltage and current of PSM and responds by updating the top
ACIM LED.
• PSM watchdog circuit sends data to FEC regarding HVDC supply voltage.
On to STANDBY Mode - PSM monitors the ON/STANDBY signal from CPU via the SCIP
bus. When the ON/STANDBY switch is set to STANDBY, the system is set to STANDBY
mode as follows:
• Contents of static RAM are copied to non-volatile RAM (time, temperature, status).
• FEC requests permission to enter STANDBY mode from CPU via SCIP bus and
starts a time-out and shutdown sequence to prevent software lockup.
• CPU initiates a wait period and saves active operating parameters to non-volatile
RAM. If CPU does not respond, FEC proceeds with ON/STANDBY sequence.
• PSM watchdog circuit stops sending data to FEC. If FEC does not respond to PSM
watchdog circuit, PSM shuts down HV supply.
• HV supply disabled.
• Power removed from internal OEMs.
• System INIT* from PSM is set low to reset the system.
• Card cage voltages are disabled (fans are off).
AC Input Module (ACIM) - PS4
• Contains an AC input receptacle (Figure 4-3), main power breaker-switch, ground
stud, power connection for OEM cables, card cage connection, and LED display.
- LEDs provide diagnostic information (see Section 9, “Troubleshooting”).
• Provides AC power interface to transformers and OEMs.
• Provides isolated and filtered HVDC squarewave to PSM for system power.
CAP
OEM
MAIN
Linear
XFMR
XFMR
OEM Control
Reg PSM
+12 Vdc to +24 Vdc
I/O Reg
Circuit HVDC PS1
Breaker Rectifier PS2
+155 V
PS3
Relay
ACIM
PS4
100-120V 50Hz
120V 60Hz
230V 50Hz
230V 60Hz Monitor Fans
VCR Printer
Figure 4-3 ACIM Module
Power Supply Module (PSM) - PS1, PS2, PS3

• Provides -5.2 Vdc for ASICs, +5 Vdc logic power, ±6 Vdc for clocks and linear cir-
cuitry, +3.3 Vdc (not currently used), +12 Vdc to +24 Vdc fan control, ±12 Vdc for ana-
log circuits, +12 V for drives, ±15 Vdc for analog circuits, 0 to +HV, and 0 to -HV for
pulser power.
• FEC monitors thermistors located on PCBs around the card cage (PSM, AIM, PIM,
and AIFOM). Averages temperature from thermistors and controls voltage to system
fans. (Power supply is disabled in STANDBY. Fans are not functional.)
• Variable ±HV powers HV pulsers and scanheads with HV multiplexers. Generates
voltages from ±15 Vdc to ±115 Vdc
• Disables all power supplies if HVDC goes below +90 Vdc.
• HV watchdog circuit detects if the FEC fails to monitor the HV voltages/currents.
Enables the user to shut down the system if the FEC fails.
• HVDC detection circuitry on PSM reports status to the FEC, which notifies the CPU if
it goes below 100 Vdc. CPU stores critical information like custom presets, measure-
ments, calcs, and error data to NV RAM. The diagnostic error log is later updated to
register a loss of HVDC. The CPU uses NV RAM information to update and protect
storage devices against data corruption.
• PSM voltage sensing circuits report the ACIM output level of HVDC to the FEC.
• PSM diagnostics are performed by the FEC, voltage, current, and system tempera-
ture monitoring.
• Monitors individual power supplies for over-voltage conditions and shuts down faulty
power supplies.
• Contains system “standby” circuitry.
• Enables OEM power.
Control The Control Subsystem (Figure 4-4) monitors user input, gives status to the user through
Subsystem UIF, provides system coordination, provides data storage, and service access.
User Interface (UIF) IIM PCM Acquisition

SCSI Subsystem
Ethernet Bus
CPU SC Bus Processing

A6B Subsystem
X2
IMEM RS 232 SCSI Network
A8B Serial Bus Interface
and Display
Hard Drive Analysis Subsystem
Optical Drive
Image (DDEA)
A1F
Bus Control Subsystem
Figure 4-4 Control Subsystem Block Diagram

The Control Subsystem consists of:
• System CPU Module (CPU)
• Image Memory Module (IMEM)
• Disk drives (part of Disk Drive, ECG, and Audio module - DDEA)
• System Control bus (SC bus, but often referred to as the SCIP bus) and IIC or I2C bus
(for configuration ID)
• Ethernet connectivity and control to PCM
• Network Interface and Analysis
• Serial ports for printer and PC remote diagnostics (RS-232)
System CPU (CPU) - A8B (32 MB)

• Motorola 68040 microprocessor; VX Works operating system.
• Loads modules requiring operating software at boot-up (NVRAM).
• Transfers scanhead tables to the FEC as needed.
• Generates coefficients and data tables for Processing Subsystem.
• Performs analysis calculations.
• Queries Power Subsystem for AP&I status.
• Ethernet interface control to PCM and external Ethernet port.
• X-bus interface to Display Subsystem (PCM).
• Time and date.
• Stores user setups in (NVRAM).
• Verifies major H/W, F/W, S/W revision, upgrade compatibility.
• Performs system diagnostics and stores results.
• Controls a serial port for a report printer or off-line PC and a serial port used for Lap-
top remote diagnostics.
Image Memory (IMEM) - A6B

• 32 MB RAM for data storage (standard)
64 MB RAM (optional, required for DiskLink)
• Stores audio data from ADAPTR and frame grab video data from PCM
• History buffers for 2D Echo, 2D Color, M-mode Echo, Color M-mode, Scrolling Dop-
pler, Physio, frame grab video, and High Q Analysis
• Stores Cineloop® frames.
Disk Drive, ECG, and Audio (DDEA) - A1F

• Houses an optional optical drive that formats, reads and writes 128 MB, 230 MB, or
540 MB magneto optical disks.
• Houses a hard drive with a disk formatted to the system limit of 2.1 MB and loaded
with system software and optional files unique to each customer and system.
• Provides connection for footswitch.
• Optional ECG and physio connectors and amplifier circuitry.
Acquisition The Acquisition Subsystem (Figure 4-5) controls the transducer, generates the electrical
Subsystem impulse (pulser) that creates the sound wave, and converts the returning echo informa-
tion into digital data. The beamformer supports 256 digitally beamformed channels.
The Acquisition Subsystem consists of:
• Front End Controller Module (FEC)
• Scanhead Select Module (S/HSEL)
• Four Bigfoot Channel Boards (CB0 - CB3)
• Analog Interface Module (AIM)
• Doppler Acquisition Module (DOPACQ) (Installed only on systems with the CW
option)
Footswitch Footswitch PCM

DDEA A1F ECG
ECG A3B
ADAPTR
(Pencil) DOP
ACQ A9B
CW A6F
CW Sum Bus
S/H
SEL Echo Bus (Tx, Rx) RF AIFOM
TGC Buses Bus
(Scanheads) CB0 - CB3 A12B
Pulser A7F - A10F
Array Control
FEC
A4F
Array
TGC
Array AIM
A5F
Figure 4-5 Acquisition Subsystem
Front End Controller (FEC) - A4F

The FEC downloads operational parameters from CPU and provides real-time control of
the front end for transmit, receive, and beamforming functions.
• Interfaces with CPU via SCIP bus to determine scanning sequence and mode of
operation.
• Provides timing signals for Tx and Rx cycle.
• Controls scanhead selection, personality, and HV Mux through the AIM and Scan-
head Select module.
• Sends scanhead operating parameters to CBs through FEC bus.
• Receives scanning sequence instructions from CPU and generates digital TGC, PRI
and other timing sequencing.
• Bus Interfaces: SCSI, FEP, Clock, SHC, digital TGC, RF, TTag, FEC, SC, and SCAN
(see paragraph “Bus Functions” on page 69).
• Via the FEP bus, the FEC monitors pulser current via the PSM and pulser voltage via
AIM. FEC compares current and voltage values to AP&I values in RAM for error
reporting and to put the system into freeze mode for patient safety.
Channel Boards (CB) A7F - A10F

• Channel Board RAM is loaded with operational parameters for selected scanhead
and TSI. Parameters define Tx and Rx beamforming behavior for each scan line and
depth. Transfers data under FEC control for each new PRI. Channel Boards are illus-
trated in Figure 4-6.
• Transmit apodization/power control under FEC control.
• Power monitor circuitry, together with the AIM, FEC, and PSM.
• Transmits to, and receives from transducer elements under FEC control.
• Digitizes RF echo signals, beamforms, adds TGC, and sends digital Rx data to Pro-
cessing Subsystem over the RF Bus for all modes.
• Anti-aliasing filtering.
• Supports 256 digital beamform channels.
• Bus Interfaces: Summing, TGC, RF, Clocks, Timing, FEC, FEP
A7F - A10F Summing Bus
32 CB0 A
CB1 I
CB2 F
32 RF
O
Bus
M
CB3
Digital Clock Bus
128
S/H 32 Rx Mux Beam- Timing Bus
SEL 8 former TGC Bus
32
32 Tx FEC Bus
SCIP Bus
32 CB
Pulsers RAM FEP Bus
Bus
PSM 128 Pulser Pulser Interfaces
HV Regulators Monitor AIM
Figure 4-6 Channel Boards
Analog Interface Module (AIM) - A5F

• Generates two-stage TGC control signal
• D/A conversion of TGC
• Relay control for desired scanhead on S/HSEL
• All front end and system clocks (240 MHz system oscillator)
• Scanhead temperature sensing to FEC via FEP
• Sends S/HSEL status and personality data to FEC via FEP bus
• Buffers and provides HV Mux selection data to the scanhead
• Supplies high voltage to HV Muxes on S/HSEL
Doppler Acquisition (DOPACQ) - A6F

• Tx/Rx Doppler for static CW and static PW (TCD)
• Intermediate Frequency Rx for steered CW Doppler
• Digitizes Doppler to AIFOM
• Processes I/Q for static and steered CW Doppler (I/Q reference is from AIM PCB)
Scanhead Select Module (S/HSEL)

• Connection and mux for transducer elements and the channel boards for array trans-
ducer
• Provides connection and interface for static CW and TCD transducers to DOPACQ
Processing The Processing Subsystem (Figure 4-7) filters and transforms echo information into digi-
Subsystem tal signal components of each modality, and stores the data as raw image video with
header information for each scan line.
RF Bus
Image Bus
Acquisition AQ Bus
Subsystem
AIFOM ADAPTR Image

SSP Memory
A12B A9B
A11B
PDBus
ECG Audio IIM
DDEA
Microphone Speakers
IIM
Ext. Audio VCR
Figure 4-7 Processing Subsystem
Advanced Intermediate Frequency Output Module (AIFOM) - A12B

• Synthetic aperture
• Converts RF summation data into quadrature (I and Q) data for beamformer data in
PW and Color Doppler modes
• Demodulates received RF digitized waveform to either amplitude- or phase-shifted
data in 2D modes
• Dynamic Range
Sample Space Processor (SSP) - A11B
• Processes Color Flow, Spectral Doppler, and M-mode data
• Persistence
• Smoothing
• FFT
• High Q Automatic Doppler Analysis calculations
• Color Doppler filtering
Advanced Digital Audio, Physio, and Translator Module

(ADAPTR) - A9B
• Triggers acquisition from front end based on SC bus command and local timer
• Audio to speakers and VCR
• Processes microphone and VCR audio; A/D conversion, gain and filtering
• Provides D/A audio reproduction for audio sources
Display The Display Subsystem (Figure 4-8) formats the echo information for display (scan con-
Subsystem version), and transfers it to the video monitor and peripheral devices.
The Display Subsystem consists of:
• Upper and Lower User Interface Modules
• Pixel Space Processor 1 (PSP1-master) and Pixel Space Processor 2 (PSP2-slave)
• Pixel Conversion Module (PCM)
• Peripheral Interface Module (PIM)
• Internal Interface Module (IIM)
User Interface Assemblies
• Upper and lower User Interface Assemblies.
• Controlled by PIM.
• UIF is extended with monitor displayed controls using a windows style format.
NOTE System diagnostics includes the UIF as part of the Display Subsystem.
Upper Lower Internal

UIF UIF Monitor/
ISEM
Ethernet
Internal
Hardcopy
PIM IIM
CPU Internal
PCM UIF UIF VCR
Control
Microphone
Video Speakers
Sync A1B
Control External
Processing Hardcopy
Subsystem, A3B
Image External
Memory Monitor
PSP External
VCR
Image A4B, A5B
A2B
Bus
Figure 4-8 Display Subsystem

Pixel Space Processor (PSP1 & 2) - A5B, A4B
• Scan conversion
• Zoom
• Static and scrolling graphics
• Freeze (buffer memory located on PSP1)
• Master/slave relationship (PSP1/PSP2)
Pixel Conversion Module (PCM) - A3B

• Controls UIF window displays (X-windows)
• Gray scale and color LUTs
• Converts non-interlaced 60/50 Hz to interlaced 30/25 Hz for OEMs
• Gray and color bar generator
Peripheral Interface Module (PIM) - A2B

• Encode/decode NTSC and PAL composite Y/C video
• System video sync (video clock)
• Controls Internal OEMs through IIM
• Upper and Lower UIF control processor
Internal Interconnect Module (IIM) - A1B

• Audio buffers for internal OEMs
• Interconnections between system and UIF, monitor, and devices
Theory of Operation: Data Paths
Data Paths Data path block diagrams show the echo signal processing path from echo reception
through video display. The data paths in the illustrations are shown by thick dashed lines
(Figure 4-9 through Figure 4-14). Solid thin lines indicate that a connection exists but is
not used for that data path.
DDEA IMAGE
MEM
DOP
S/H ACQ AIFOM PCM
Sel
CH BD ADAPTR PIM IIM
Array FEC
S/H SSP PSP
2
AIM Audio
Figure 4-9 2D Black and White Signal Path

DDEA IMEM
Ext.
Audio
DOP
S/H ACQ AIFOM PCM
Sel
Array FEC
S/H SSP PSP
2
AIM Audio
Figure 4-10 PW Doppler, M-Mode and Color Path
DDEA Ext. IMEM

CW Audio
(Pencil DOP
S/H ACQ AIFOM PCM
Probe)
Sel
FEC
PSP
2
SSP
AIM Audio
Figure 4-11 CW and Static PW Doppler (TCD) Signal Path

IMEM
Frame Grab PSP
Frame Playback
Grab
Data
Live
PIM
Video
A/D PCM D\A
Internal
VCR IIM PIM
Analog Live Video IIM
External Audio
VCR ADAPTR
2
Figure 4-12 Internal/External VCR Frame Grab Signal Path

External Live Video

PIM
VCR
IIM
Audio *
ADAPTR 2
* These connections are located on rear of the system.
Figure 4-13 External VCR Playback Signal Path

* Video
PCM PIM
External
Image Bus VCR
* Audio
ADAPTR
* These connections are located on the rear of the system.
Figure 4-14 External VCR Record Signal Path

Theory of Operation: Output Power Monitor Theory
Output Power Output power monitor (Figure 4-15) provides patient safety by ensuring the system is
Monitor operating within acoustical power and intensity (AP&I) limits. It also protects hardware
from destructive or unsafe conditions. Power monitoring consists of AP&I software
Theory loaded into RAM; PSM current monitor circuitry; AIM voltage monitor circuitry; FEC track-
ing of HV current and pulser voltage; FEC reporting to the CPU; and the CPU acting on
any errors.
The output power monitor is designed to detect any single failure in the system, for
example, a faulty power supply, a faulty beamformer component, a software failure, a
defective scanhead or scanhead data file. Mode information (such as, PRI, voltage,
burst, and so forth.) sent to the beamformer is also verified before allowing the beam-
former to start. This prevents the system from inadvertently creating a temporary
over-power condition.
API Monitor
PSM Pulser AIM (HV Out) Channel Boards

Voltage* ± HV Waveform
Regulator
generator
Pulser
current sense Power
AMP
AIM
± HV sense
Transducer
CPU
SC bus
FEC
API software
from Hard Drive SCSI bus
* Actual Pulser voltage is determined by user selections but its source is the + 80V from the PSM.
Figure 4-15 Power Monitor Block Diagram

Both software and hardware watchdogs disable the transmit function when errors are
detected. Software watchdogs monitor variable parameters (for example, AP&Is vary
from scanhead to scanhead). When the software watchdog in the system CPU receives
an error report from a power monitor, it disables the system from transmitting. Hardware
watchdog circuits disable or shut down the system when maximum, and in some cases
minimum, parameters are exceeded (for example, minimum power supply output voltage
or minimum current limits).
The CPU uses the AP&I software program and system control settings to calculate the
required power output for the selected transducer and operating modality. These values
are sent to the FEC to control generation of pulsers for the beamformer. Voltage and cur-
rent monitors compare the measured pulser control values with the allowable limits listed
in the AP&I software tables.
NOTE Software AP&I tables contain power maximums for each transducer in its
allowed operating modes. This data is included in the system reference manual.
The power monitor also provides system and hardware protection through hardware
watchdog circuitry for maximum voltage, maximum pulser currents and output electrical
power. When measured parameters exceed allowable values, the power monitor circuitry
disables the supply and signals the error to the system CPU.
The beamformer monitors the average pulser voltage supplied to the beamformer, pulser
output voltage, and average current. If the monitored values exceed the maximums for
voltage and pulser currents, maximum pulser output electrical power and maximum
pulser power dissipation, the beamformer software watchdog disables the beamformer
and signals the system controller.
Time-outs in the system software verify that the system software can communicate with
the FEC and the Power Subsystem. If either subsystem is not active and functioning, the
system stops the beamformer and shuts down the pulser supply. Time-outs are initiated
at regular intervals and acknowledged by the affected circuits, if operating properly.
Time-out alerts usually are reset if mode, power, or some other function is changed.
Theory of Operation: Bus Functions
Bus The HDI 3500 bus structure is illustrated in Figure 4-16.

Functions
CPU
ADAPTR PCM DDEA
AIFOM PSM ACIM UIF IMEM
SSP IIM
Centerplane
PIM
NOTE The Centerplane reports directly to the CPU.
PSP DOPACQ
KEY
SCIP bus
PSP II FEC Channel Bd’s
Power I ²C bus
FEC bus
AIM
Ethernet bus
S/H SELECT System I ²C bus
Figure 4-16 HDI 3500 Bus Structure

Control System Control Bus (SC or SCIP bus)
Subsystem The System Control bus is the main communication network between the CPU and other
Buses modules. Each PCB on the bus houses a PROM called a Serial Control Interface Proces-
sor (SCIP), which is used to interface between the bus and each PCB. This bus is often
referred to verbally and in documentation as the “SCIP” bus, and less often as the “Con-
trol” bus, “C” bus, or the “SC” bus. All of these names mean “the bus that the CPU uses
to control the system.”
• Relieves Module Operation Processor (MOP) in servicing control bus activity
• Master-slave multi-drop communication network
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI)

• Interfaces optical and hard disk drives to CPU and FEC
• Provides an external port for future use
Acquisition FEC Bus

Subsystem Provides operational parameters and controls use of them by CBs
Buses
Timing Bus
Carries real-time control signals to CBs, AIM, and DOPACQ
• Carefully controlled to ensure sync with front end clocks
• Start and stop Tx/Rx cycle
• Controls output of the front end ultrasound data on SUM and RF buses
Power Supply Sync Bus

Transfers real-time high-voltage power supply status between FEC and PSM to sync
starting, stopping, and power level changes in the system
SUM Bus
A cascaded bus that links a summing ASIC to another summing ASIC across Channel
Boards. Using this bus, specially designed ASICs sum multiple echo streams from each
scan line to the data stream from another ASICs data summation. It results in a higher
quality echo bit stream representing the echo from each scan line.
S/H Control Bus

Unidirectional bus between scanhead control sequencer on FEC (master) and AIM for
SH control.
RF Bus
Carries filtered digital echo data from the front end to the AIFOM for processing.
Digital TGC Bus

• Carries current digital value of TGC curves and digital values for pulser voltage regu-
lators.
• AIM receives digital TGC values from FEC for D-to-A conversion to analog TGC volt-
ages applied to the CBs via the Analog TGC Bus.
• AIM receives digital pulser values for D-to-A conversion to a high-voltage analog DC
value for each channel.
Analog TGC Bus

Two differential analog buses on S/HSEL driven by AIM and received by all CBs for two
variable gain stages.
CW Sum Bus
• Differential current bus on the S/HSEL driven by CBs.
• AIM receives and processes current representation value of beamformed CW data.
FEP Bus
Extension of CPU bus on FEC bus used for nonreal-time tasks such as output power
monitoring and scanhead interface control.
Time Tag Bus

Used by digital signal processing modules for time tag data. FEC generates time tag sig-
nals. The FEP bus is an extension of the FEC's CPU bus. It is used for nonreal-time
tasks such as output power monitoring and scanhead interface control.
SCAN Bus
Used by the SH Control Sequencer in the FEC to load Mux Relay instructions into the SH
Array Buffer on the AIM PCB.
Clock Bus
The main system clock on the AIM PCB uses this bus to synchronize clocks on other
PCBs.
SCSI Bus
Used in the Control Subsystem and Acquisition subsystems to reduce loading time of
large beamformer files. Acquisition control files are sent directly from the system hard
disk to the FEC over this bus rather than over the SCIP bus.
Processing RF Bus
Buses Same as “RF Bus” on page 71 in the Acquisition Subsystem. The RF Bus is used by the
AIFOM to receive data and pass I&Q information back to the beamformer and FEC.
AQ
Passes AIFOM processed 2D data to the ADAPTR for translation processing. Passes
Doppler, M-mode, and Color data to SSP for processing.
PD
Passes processed Doppler, Color, and M-mode data from SSP to ADAPTR.
Image
Passes image data from ADAPTR, stripped of audio data, to PSP1.
Display Buses Image

Same as in Processing Subsystem but also passes digitized VCR video data from PCM
to IMEM and ADAPTR for audio processing.
Video
Passes RGB data from PSP to PCM and between PCM and PIM.
Theory of Operation: System Cable Diagrams
Acquisition Subsystem Processing Subsystem Display Subsystem
Upper UIF UIM Lower UIF
RS422
Ext. VCR
Audio
Channel Boards CB0-3 Doppler Audio

RF Bus
IIM
PSP2
RS422
SSP ADAPTR IMEM PSP1

RS422
S
S
S PCM PIM
Framegrab Path
DOPACQ RF
AIFOM S
BUS
Scanhead
Select Control
Subsystem Ext. Monitor
AIM I2C
Footswitch Ext. Hardcopy
BUS
Ext. VCR
DDEA Footswitch
ECG
S SCIP Bus S CPU Int. Monitor

Int. Hardcopy
FEC S Int. VCR
S Microphone
Speakers
Power Sub-System Int. Ethernet
FEP BUS
AC to OEMs
PSM ACIM Filtered HV to PSM
Note: s indicates PCBs that have PROMS. Figure 4-17 HDI 3500 System Functional Block Diagram
Page 76 4730-0036-03 HDI 3500 Field Service Manual
DDEA
Dynamic
Range
Gain & Display Packet
ECG Position
Heart Rate
CPU
R
Wave Trigger Acqusition Trigger
A/D LP Filt FEC
Detect Delay
Dop Audio D/A & Spkr L & R Audio

from SPM Filter Mux
VCR L & R Audio Internal
Mixer Interface
Dual Microphone
Normali- Inphase Module
RF Spkr
zation & Quadrature CPU (IIM)
Bus Mute
Synthetic Bandpass
Aperature Filter Spkr
Reconstruc- Volume
tion Vol AQ/PD Bus To All
AIM
(CW Advanced Digital Audio, Physio and Translator Image Memory Data
Translation IMEM
Dop) Module (ADAPTR)
2D
CH
Boards Multizone
(RF Reconstruction,
Data) Detection,
Compression M-Mode M-Mode
Acquire Temporal Output
and Summation Conversion Conversion
M-Mode Filter Scroll
FEC PD ABIC Output

(RF
Color
Header) Color
/Pwr Wall Line Auto Axial Post /Pwr
Filter Correction Correlation Filter Proc
Normali-
zation & Inphase PW CW &
Dop Temp Spectral
Synthetic Quadrature Inter- Spectral
Filter/ HQ
Aperature Bandpass polator Map
Dual Invert
Reconstruc- Filter
RF AQ
tion
Bus ABIC
CW Dop
Input
CW Wall Spectral Spec
FFT Remap
Gain Filter Sample Gap Fill
Advanced IF Output
(AIFOM)
Audio
Hilbert Audio Dop Audio to
Gap
Xform Resampler ADAPTR
Filler
Sample Space Processor

(SSP)
Figure 4-18 Processing Subsystem Block Diagram

PSP1 PCM PIM

Display Windows
controller RGB Non-I
Static MOP Generator
Scrolling
RGB
Color & Frame Int RGB Non-I ,
All Rate
Output Screen Gray Mux Monitor
Data Video Con-
Buffer Buffer LUT
Mux verter Mon DAC RGB Non-I , (R/P)
Memory
M-Mode & Mux
I Doppler RGB Interlaced ,
M All Data OEM
E Interface 2D, Color
& Pwr DAC
M OEM IIM
RGB Interlaced ,
Mux
(R/P)
Color/Gray bar gen Frame Buffer

Color
/Pwr Color Scan & Color Maps Video Encoder
EXT VCR
Converter
Ping Pong Play (R/P SVID)
Frame
Bufffer Back EXT CVID (R/P)
Grab
Mux B/W (R/P)
Data Video
24 bit to 16
2D Decoder
bit converter Int. VCR
Playback
PSP1 &
Pixel Clock, Sync & Test 2&
Interpolator Pattern Gen PCM
R Wave Detect MOP
2D Scan
COnverter
Dynamic Contrast MOP

UIF RS422 UIF
Enhancement FPGA
Processor
PSP2
IIM
FPGA
UIM
Ethernet
FPGA
Foot
switch DDEA CPU
ECG
Upper UIF Lower UIF
Figure 4-19 Display Subsystem Block Diagram

TGC Channel Board 0 SUM BUS from

CH BD's 1-3
Z
SUMMATION
I TGC MUX TGC A/D AIFOM
FIFO
F Summed RF
Z Return REC DELAY

I Echoes
Front End Controller
F DELAY
(FEC)
Pulse
Out CONTROL
T/R PULSER RF HEADER SEQ AIFOM
Z
I MUX
F RELAYS
TIMIMG & PULSE
CONTROL
HV_IN +/-
HV REG PSM
S/H CONTROL
C CW Xmit CW FEP BUS

PULSER TIMING S/H PERSONALITY
W PULSER INTERFACE
Scanhead S/H PERSONALITY &

LINE SEQUENCER
CONTROL
TGC
TGC FRAME SEQUENCER
text
Temp ACQ TRIG
TEMPERATURE SENSING
(ADAPTR)
PRF SEQUENCER
HV
MUX HV +/- 80VDC
TGC SEQUENCER TGC SLIDE

CW Rec CW Dop
CW RECEIVE AIFOM POTS
MPTEE TEMP MONITOR

Analog Interface Module (AIM)
HV RELAY CONTROL
Scan DOPACQ
Head CPU
MOP
Select
Figure 4-20 Acquisition Sub-System Block Diagram

Installation: Pre- Installation
5 Installation
Pre-
Installation
Introduction The purpose of the pre-installation on-site evaluation (pre-site) is to ensure a trouble-free
installation and to assist the customer in providing an environment that supports the reli-
able performance of a Philips ultrasound system. These instructions are intended to
guide you through a comprehensive inspection that ensures all physical, electrical, and
environmental conditions are appropriate for optimal system operation.
Refer to the system specifications in Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3 when evaluating
the site.
Required • Tool Kit and Digital Voltmeter (DVM)

Materials • ONEAC Line Viewer (order from service support one week prior to site visit)
• Oscilloscope
• Three-prong Test Plug (6005-0564-01)
• ATL General Service Manual (4720-0219-XX)
• Power Line Data Sticker (4765-0247-XX)
Environmental Verify the system is to be operated in a room that meets the environmental requirements
Requirements listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 System Specifications
Parameter Metric Value U.S. Value
Height (without VCR)1 142.2 cm 56.0 in
Width 72.0 cm 28.35 in
Depth 110.4 cm 43.45 in
Weight with Peripherals1 200 kg 440 lbs
Fully Crated Shipping Weight (VCR separate) 295 kg 650 lbs
Ambient Operational Temperature2 16° to 40° C 61° to 104° F
Internal Operational Temperature2 16° to 55° C 61° to 131° F

Internal Operational Humidity 15% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage Temperature3 -35° to 65° C -31° to 149° F
Storage Humidity 15% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
1. Height with VCR is 157.5 cm (62.0 in); height with monitor removed is 122.0 cm (48 inches); weight without monitor or
peripherals is 172 kg (380 lbs).
2. Atmospheric pressure must be between 1013 hPa to 709 hPa (1.0 to 0.7 Atm).
3. Atmospheric pressure must be between 1013 hPa to 303 hPa (1.0 to 0.3 Atm).
Table 5-2 System Crate Dimensions

Dimensions Wood Crate Corrugate Crate
Height 61 in / 155 cm 61 in / 155 cm
Width 39 in / 99 cm 38 in / 96.5 cm
Depth 49 in / 114 cm 48 in / 109 cm
Electrical Power
Requirements
WARNING For safety and liability reasons, do not disassemble any power outlet or open any electri-
cal panel. Have the facility representative confirm wiring compliance with the criteria
specified below.
➤ To verify a dedicated/isolated line:

1. Explain to the facilities representative that, for reliability, a dedicated/isolated line
meeting the power requirements listed in Table 5-3 is important.
2. Inform the facility representative of the current draw of the system and its acceptable
voltage range. It is the responsibility of the facility representative to determine the
proper size of the wire based upon the length of the feed.
3. Determine the location of the electrical outlet to be used by the system.
4. Verify the proper wiring of the outlet using a three-wire test plug. This plug also tests
for the presence of a ground, but it cannot detect neutral/ground reversals.
5. Measure the hot/neutral, hot/ground, and neutral/ground voltages with no load.
6. Determine line loss:
a. Measure the voltage at the outlet with the load on (system connected and pow-
ered up).
b. Calculate the percentage of voltage loss across the line using the formula:
Percent line loss = [(A - B)/A] x 100
c. A is the voltage at the wall outlet with the system disconnected and B is the volt-
age at the wall outlet with the system on.
7. Use an ONEAC line viewer to measure power-line noise, following the procedures
provided with the ONEAC. [Section 3, “Power”, General Service Manual
(4720-0219-XX)]. Repeat with a load applied.
8. Record your power quality observations and measurements on the forms supplied
with the ONEAC.
9. Affix a Power Line Data sticker to the most qualified outlet in each of the primary
operating areas. Add the circuit breaker number and location.
10. Inform the facilities representative of your measurement results and advise on any
corrective actions needed.
Table 5-3 Power Specifications

120 Vac, 50 Hz 230 Vac, 50 Hz
Measurement (system only) 100 Vac, 50 Hz 120 Vac, 60 Hz 230 Vac, 60 Hz
Nominal Voltage (acceptable voltage range)1 100 Vac 120 Vac 230 Vac
(90 - 110 Vac) (108-132 Vac) (198-264 Vac)
Current Consumption (normal/max)2 9.1/10.1 A 7.5 /8.4 A 3.8 /4.2 A
Table 5-3 Power Specifications (Continued)
120 Vac, 50 Hz 230 Vac, 50 Hz
Measurement (system only) 100 Vac, 50 Hz 120 Vac, 60 Hz 230 Vac, 60 Hz
Power Consumption (normal/max)2 870 /1050 W 870/1050 W 870/1050 W
910/1010 VA 910-1010 VA 910-1010 VA
Thermal Load (VA x 3.41) 3105/3440 BTU 3070/3440 BTU 3085/3440 BTU
Neutral-to-Ground < 3 Vac RMS
Line Loss < 3%
Distortion < 20%
Common Mode Noise < 1.5 Vp-p
Normal Mode Noise < 10 Vp-p
1. Voltage range is shown as the minimum and maximum acceptable voltage that can be supplied to the system.
2. “Normal current and power consumption” is operation with OEMs turned on and in an “idle” state (not in full operation).
“Maximum current and power consumption” is operation with the OEMs in their maximum operating modes, such as
printing).
Electrostatic During normal system operation, the presence of electrostatic discharge (ESD) can
Discharge cause system lock-ups and reliability problems.
CAUTION With system covers or shields removed, ESD will always cause component damage.
ESD damage is cumulative and may not be apparent at first, as indicated by a hard fail-
ure, but can cause degraded performance. Therefore, always use proper ESD handling
procedures.
ESD can result from low humidity, carpeting, linen, and clothing. Avoid placing the sys-
tem directly under or close to HVAC vents. While special equipment is required to mea-
sure ESD levels, you can determine the presence of ESD during the following steps:
1. Check for the presence of ESD by walking around where the system will be installed
and touching grounded surfaces.
2. Ask the operators if they have experienced static discharge in the work area.
3. Suggest possible ESD minimizing devices and their usage, for example, anti-static
mats, humidifiers, and sprays.
Some facts about ESD:
• ESD voltages in excess of 2,000 V cause a shock.
• ESD is audible above 5,000 V.
• ESD is visible above 10,000 V.
• Voltages as low as 40 V can damage semiconductor devices.
Electromagnetic Electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI) typically
and Radio cause image noise. EMI and RFI can be generated by a variety of electrical devices and
Frequency may not be apparent until installation. The interference can be transmitted over power
Interference lines or radiated through the air.
1. Use an AM radio tuned between stations around 1600 KHz as an EMI/RFI tester
while walking around the room.
2. Note any obvious or potential noise generators. Typical generating devices include
(but are not limited to) gel warmers, coffee pots, air conditioners, fans, photocopiers,
computers, printers, electric typewriters, lab equipment, surgical equipment, MRI
units, elevators, radios, light dimmers, and refrigerators.
Dust Air circulation requirements of the system and the location of its air filter can cause dust
to accumulate rapidly on the air filter and cause the system to overheat. Advise the cus-
tomer about the need to maintain a low level of dust in the room.
Refer to “Preventive Maintenance” on page 181, for the fan filter cleaning procedure.
Lighting Ambient light can interfere with the viewing of video monitors. A darkened room is pre-
ferred. Note if there are shades or blinds, small lamps or dimmer switches in the room,
which can be used to control ambient light.
System Wiring Requirements

Specifications The electrical feed to the system shall be a dedicated/isolated line (no other equipment
on the same line) with a third-wire ground. The ground wire shall be an insulated, iso-
lated solid copper conductor bonded to the ground bus of the service panel. The outlet
shall be a Hospital Grade Receptacle (for installations in North America) or an Isolated
Ground Receptacle (International). Proper installation shall reflect compliance with the
national electrical code.
Image The technician is responsible for configuring the HDI system based on the information
Management received from the site’s network administrator. If in-wall cabling is used, it is the cus-
Network tomer's responsibility to install the correct type of cable in accordance with all applicable
Requirements network requirements and local building and fire codes. It is also the customer's respon-
sibility to maintain the in-wall cabling for the life of the system. The most common type of
cable used is 10 Base-T (unshielded twisted pair). Refer to Table 5-4 to identify what type
of network cable is installed.
➤ Perform the following steps before installing the NetLink option:
1. Identify the system administrator (and backup person, if possible).
2. Obtain the following information from the system administrator:
- A list of all equipment that is part of the Image Management network
- Logical diagram of the network showing topology, subnets, and so forth
- Diagram of the network relative to Philips systems
- Locations of equipment communicating with the installation
- Locations of all LAN attachment points related to the installation
- Locations of power outlets and connector types
- Locations of any dedicated analog phone lines for UpLink™ modem connection
- All necessary Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and subnet information, including
application entity titles for all network devices, subnet masks, aliases, and model
IDs
3. Verify the network cabling has been properly installed:
a. Determine the type of cabling installed (Table 5-4).
b. If 10 Base 2 cabling has been installed, verify that it has been terminated on each
end with a 50 ohm terminator. Intermittent problems and reduced performance are
the usual symptoms of missing terminators, mismatched cabling, or the addition
of cable without regard to configuration. Full network crashes can also occur.
c. Use the network layout diagram to determine the location of all LAN attachment
points.
Installation: System Installation
Table 5-4 Network Cable Types

Cable Type Cable Identifier Cable Terminator
10 Base 2 BNC connectors on wall plate 50 ohm terminator on both
cable ends
10 Base T Modular phone type connectors No terminator required
on the wall plate
4. Identify OEM equipment installers and contact them regarding the installation.
5. Call Philips to check device compatibility prior to connecting new devices (printers,
archive devices) to the network that are not on the approved compatibility list.
6. Proceed to “NetLink Installation” on page 126 to install NetLink. NetLink conforms to
DICOM standard version 3.0. Centralized printers, print servers, network file servers,
and review workstations that comply with these DICOM standards can take advan-
tage of NetLink. To confirm DICOM compatibility, review the DICOM Conformance
Statement for the new device to verify that it supports the services used by NetLink.
System
Installation
Introduction This section contains inspection and installation procedures.
NOTE Some parts of this section include policies, equipment requirements, and proce-
dures that may apply only to U.S. field use. Distributors, affiliates, or other autho-
rized service personnel should use their equivalent document.
Before the system is delivered, perform a site inspection as described in this section.
After you have completed the inspection and installation of the system, verify correct
operation using the performance tests in “Performance Tests” on page 129.
Materials and • Three-prong Test Plug (6005-0564-01)

Equipment • FSE Tool Kit
• ONEAC Line Viewer (order from service support one week prior to site visit)
• Oscilloscope
• DVM (digital volt meter)
• Pre-installation and Installation FSRs
• Quality Assurance Audit (PM) label (4100-0940-XX) and label overlay
(4100-0941-XX)
• Locate customer’s manuals for external peripheral devices, if any
Preliminary ➤ Inspect the shipping crate before unpacking the system.

Inspection 1. Examine the shipping crate for damage caused by rough handling. Look for evidence
that the crate was opened.
2. Verify the Shockwatch and Tiltwatch indicators on the outside of the crate have not
been activated. If the indicators appear red in color, check the system for further dam-
age.
3. Report any damage or pilferage to the carrier and to the traffic department.
Uncrating Wood Crate
Instructions
CAUTION Before uncrating the system, ensure the area in front of the shipping crate ramp is clear
for at least nine feet. (The ramp is the front side and is labeled “OPEN THIS END”.)
➤ To uncrate the system from a wood crate:

1. Remove the four bolts securing the top and remove the top (Figure 5-1 and
Figure 5-2).
2. Remove the six bolts securing the ramp (the crate front).
3. Lower the hinged ramp.
4. Remove the front and side cardboard/foam panels.
5. Remove the front caster chock.
6. Verify the upper UIF panel is securely latched (slide button is in up position) on the
left side of the UIF panel.
7. Verify the monitor is correctly installed and latched:
a. Grasp the monitor under one speaker and lift. If the latch is properly latched, the
monitor will not raise.
b. Repeat step ‘a’ on the opposite side of the monitor.
c. If the monitor is not secured properly, remove the VCR, then remove the monitor
from the system.
d. Re-install the monitor ensuring the monitor mounting prongs mate into both
latches.
e. Repeat steps ‘a’ and ‘b’ to verify the monitor assembly is secure. Refer to
Figure 5-3 for the monitor latch positions.
CAUTION It is possible for the monitor to be installed in the tilt swivel base without the locking
prongs mating with the latches. In this case, the latches can still be placed in the correct
latching positions, but the monitor will not be secure.
WARNING Use care when moving the system down the ramp. Serious injury or equipment damage
can result if the system becomes out of control.
8. Verify the caster brakes are released and roll the system down the ramp.
9. Knock the wood crate down flat and return to Bothell.
Figure 5-1 Wooden Crate Details
Back Panel Bolts

Back Panel (6 Plcs)
Side Panel
Front
Chock Top
Top
Bolts
(4 Plcs)
1
Side
Pallet Panel Side Top Pad
Bolts Panel
(4 Plcs)
Ramp
Ramp Bolts 1 All bolts are secured with

(6 Plcs) a flat washer and a wing nut.
Figure 5-2 Unpacking Details
Top
(1) Remove ramp bolts.

and the top bolts.
(2) Lift top off (3) Remove front chock

the crate and Ramp .(4) Roll out the system.
lower the ramp.
Front
chock
Figure 5-3 Monitor Latch Positions
Locked Unlocked
Corrugate Crate
CAUTION Before uncrating the system, ensure the area in front of the shipping crate ramp is clear
for at least nine feet. (The ramp is the front side and is labeled “OPEN THIS END”.)
➤ To uncrate the system from a corrugate crate:

1. Inspect the tilt and shock indicators on the outside of the crate. If the indicators show
red, inspect and test the system to determine if it was damaged during shipment.
WARNING Use caution when removing the strapping bands securing the shipping container. These
bands are under enough tension to cause injury if removed carelessly.
2. Remove (cut) the two plastic strapping bands from around the corrugate container
(Figure 5-4).
3. Remove the top cover from the corrugate crate.
4. Remove any accessories placed on the corrugate tray in front of the monitor
(Figure 5-5).
5. Cut the taped edges of the container and remove the two-piece corrugate box from
around the system.
6. Remove accessories and other loose-packed items not removed in step 4.
7. Remove the two 9/16-in bolts securing the front section of the inner crate to the pallet.
This piece also serves as a ramp.
8. Position the tall end of the ramp so that it butts up against the pallet at the front of the
system with the beveled end of the ramp sloping to the floor.
WARNING Use care when moving the system down the ramp. Serious injury or equipment damage
can result if the system becomes out of control.
9. Verify the upper UIF panel is securely latched (slide button is in up position) on the
left side of the UIF panel.
10. Verify the monitor is correctly installed and latched:
a. Grasp the monitor under one speaker and lift. If the latch is properly latched, the
monitor will not raise.
b. Repeat step ‘a’ on the opposite side of the monitor.
c. If the monitor is not secured properly, remove the VCR, then remove the monitor
from the system.
d. Re-install the monitor, ensuring the monitor mounting prongs mate into both
latches.
e. Repeat steps ‘a’ and ‘b’ to verify the monitor assembly is secure. Refer to
Figure 5-3 for the monitor latch positions.
CAUTION It is possible for the monitor to be installed in the tilt swivel base without the locking
prongs mating with the latches. In this case, the latches can still be placed in the correct
latching positions, but the monitor will not be secure.
11. Carefully pull the system off of the pallet and down the ramp.
12. Properly dispose of the shipping materials. Do not return these materials to Bothell.
Figure 5-4 Corrugate Crate Details
Corrugate lid
Plastic strapping
Corrugate carton
(2 halves)
Bolts (2 plcs)
Ramp
Pallet
Figure 5-5 Corrugate Crate Unpacking Details
Corrugate carton
Monitor blocks (foam)
Accessory tray
Side accordion braces (foam)
(corrugate)
Handle
blocks
(foam)
General
Inspection
WARNING Dangerous voltages are present inside the system. Do not connect the system to AC line
voltage until correct line voltage has been verified and a thorough inspection of the sys-
tem has been performed.
➤ To perform a general inspection:

1. Inventory the shipment against the packing list.
2. Inspect the video monitor for damage.
3. Mount the monitor on the system (“Monitor” on page 218).
4. Connect power and signal cables to the monitor. Verify that the shorter power cord,
labeled “120 Volts” and “MONITOR” is connected to the monitor.
CAUTION The VCR power cord can be connected to the monitor by mistake. On 230 Volt systems,
this will apply 230 Volts to the 120 Volt monitor, which will damage the monitor.
5. Verify the monitor swivels correctly on its base from left to right and up and down.
6. Inspect the outside surfaces of the system for damage.
7. Verify the system rolls and turns smoothly on its casters.
8. Remove the front, rear, and right side covers.
9. Verify the hardcopy device is undamaged and firmly fastened to the system.
10. Inspect the VCR and mount it securely on top of the monitor.
11. Remove any loose packing material, dust, or debris from the interior of the system.
Mechanical
Inspection
CAUTION Take care not to damage cables connected to modules or peripherals.
➤ To perform a mechanical inspection:

1. Verify all modules are secure.
2. Inspect the remaining fasteners.
3. Seat and tighten modules and connectors as necessary.
Electrical The electrical inspection may require reference to the power distribution wiring and
Inspection cabling diagrams (see “Cabling” on page 235); “Parts” on page 355, which contains infor-
mation on PCB locations and part numbers; “Configuration” on page 327, which contains
current information on module; and PROM replacement revision levels.
NOTE Perform the electrical inspection only if problems are encountered during power
up or if there is evidence of shipping damage.
➤ To perform an electrical inspection:

1. Remove the rear cover from the system.
2. Verify the VCR and hardcopy device power cords are plugged into the ACIM.
3. Verify that all transformer and power connections are secure.
4. Remove the control panel lock bar. Verify the ribbon cable connections on the CIM
are correct and secure.
5. Verify the connections on the VCR and video printer are secure and correct.
6. Refer to “VCR Control Settings” on page 101 and verify that the VCR is set up cor-
rectly.
7. Refer to “Printer Control Settings” on page 103 and verify that the color video printer
is set up correctly.
NOTE Use the inspection procedure appropriate to the hardcopy device installed in the
system.
Reassembly
CAUTION Use extreme care when reassembling the system to avoid pinching, stretching, or other-
wise damaging the system signal and power distribution cables.
Setup 1. Reassemble the control panels and replace all covers.

2. Dispose of packing materials and clean up the unloading area.
3. Move the system to the installation location.
4. Verify proper wall outlet wiring and voltage levels have a three-prong test plug and a
DVM.
WARNING Do not plug the system in if a wiring fault is discovered. Advise the customer immediately
and proceed only after the fault has been corrected.
5. Connect scanheads, peripheral cables, and the power cable.

6. Center the monitor Brightness and Contrast controls.
7. Verify the system fans are operating.
8. Verify proper system operation using the procedures in “Performance Tests” on
page 129.
VCR Control NOTE To ensure proper system operation, turn on all OEMs prior to checking system
Settings functionality.
Panasonic AGMD830/835 VCR

The VCR can be programmed using the on-screen programming menu or the VCR front
panel display screen. To use the VCR's front panel screen, refer to the OEM manual or
the VCR and Report Printers Field Service Manual, (P/N 4720-0223-XX).
1. Press Setups and select Peripherals, Internal VCR, and Panasonic MD830 or
MD835. Select Close at the bottom of the display.
2. Set the MENU switch on the VCR to SET. Set the MODE LOCK switch to OFF.
3. Press Superkey and Video simultaneously to toggle through the on-screen menus
(such as, internal VCR, internal color printer, and so forth). The VCR menu lists
on-screen menu items, which are on Table 5-5.
4. Verify the VCR parameter settings. Refer to Table 5-6 for VCR front panel control
functions while in programming mode.
5. Press Setups and change the VCR configuration to SVHS to return to normal config-
uration.
6. Set the VCR Menu switch to OFF
.
Table 5-5 Panasonic AGMD830/835 NTSC/PAL 120 V

VCR Setup
Parameter Setting
Tilt Down Panel
MODE LOCK OFF
MENU SET (during programming, off
during normal operation)
Audio Out Mix
Audio Out Normal
Input S-Video
S-VHS Auto
On Screen Menu
VISS Off
Tape Select T-120 (NTSC) or E-180 (PAL)
Auto Back On
Tape In Mode Stop
Tape End Mode Stop
REC Tape End Stop
STBY Off Time 5 Min.
HI-FI REC On
Audio Dub CH1
Edit (NTSC only) Off
Table 5-5 Panasonic AGMD830/835 NTSC/PAL 120 V
VCR Setup (Continued)
Parameter Setting
YC Filter (NTSC only) Off
Notch (PAL only) Off
Hour Meter XXXX Hr
Bit Length 8 Bit
Stop Bit Stop-1
Parity None
Baud Rate 9600
Table 5-6 VCR Programming Controls
VCR Control Programming Operation
Stop Moves the selection item cursor forward
Rewind Moves the selection item cursor backward
Play Returns to the previous menu page
Record Advances to the next menu page
Fast Forward Moves the menu selection to the item below
Inside Search Dial Moves the menu selection to the item above or below
Printer Control For printers that use on-screen programming, use the following procedure to setup the
Settings printer menus.
1. Press Menu on the printer front panel.
2. Press Superkey and Video simultaneously to toggle through the on-screen menus.
3. Set the printer control settings as specified in the printer setup tables below
(Table 5-7 through Table 5-18).
4. Set the Menu switch to OFF.
Table 5-7 Sony UP-21MD Color Printer Settings
Parameter Setting
Rear Panel
NTSC/PAL Set to system video type
Color Adjust
LOAD COLOR 1
CYN - RED 0
MAG - GRN 1
YEL - BLU 0
DARK 0
LIGHT -4
SHARPNESS 8
INTERPOL OFF
SAVE COLOR EXEC
Layout Setup
MEMORY FRAME
MULTI PIX 1
SEPARATE *****
WINDOW Press >
Parameter Setting
Window Setup
H START -20/0 DOTS (NTSC/PAL)
V START -8/16 DOTS (NTSC/PAL)
H WIDTH 952/960 DOTS (NTSC/PAL)
V WIDTH 476/588 DOTS (NTSC/PAL)
SAVE EXEC
CAPTION User-set to desired position
Printer Setup
PRINT QTY 1
GAMMA NORMAL
PRN SPEED HIGH
MOTION CHK OFF
LOAD USER 1
SYSTEM Press >
FUNCTION Press >
C-BALANCE Press >
System Setup
LCD CNTR 7
BAUD RATE 4800
BEEP ON
IRE 100
Parameter Setting
SAVE USER 1
Function Setup
AUTO LIVE OFF
IMMED.CAP OFF
RM2 FUNC C&PRINT
CLEAR ALL
Color Balance Setup
BAL X 50
BAL Y 50
BAL STEP 5
Input Setup
INPUT SEL RGB
HUE na
COLOR na
GAIN 0
OFFSET 0
AGC OFF
Output Setup
DISPLAY ON
RBN REMAIN OFF
SOURCE THRU
Parameter Setting
SYNC ON G OFF
MONI C-R 0
MONI M-G 0
MONI Y-B 0
Table 5-8 Sony UP-5600MD/UP-5600MDU Color Video

Printer Setup
Parameter Setting
Color Adjustment Setup Menu
Preset 1
Red C-R +5
Green M-G +5
Blue Y-B +5
Dark -5
Light +5
Save 1, EXEC
Analog Setup Menu
Hue (NTSC only) Default
Color Default
Gain Default
AGC OFF
Printer Setup (Continued)
Parameter Setting
Moni C-R Default
Moni M-G Default
Moni Y-B Default
System Setup
Display ON
Beep ON
LCD ON
LCD-CNTR Center
Baud Rate Default
Monitor EE
User Set 1
Print Setup
H-Shift -24/-16 Dots (NTSC/PAL)
V-Shift -8/-10 Lines (NTSC/PAL)
H-Size 952/924 Dots (NTSC/PAL)
V-Size 480/576 Lines (NTSC/PAL)
Setups
Separate ON
Dup-Image OFF
Sharpness +4
Parameter Setting
System Function
Remote2 C&Print
Remote3A Print (Does not matter. Used only with
Sony footswitch.)
Remote3B Back-Sp (Does not matter. Used only
with Sony footswitch.)
Remote3C CAP/SRC (Does not matter. Used only
with Sony footswitch.)
Clear Part
Capture Single
Timer OFF
Control Panel Button Setups
Motion Correct OFF
Input Select RGB
Multi-Picture 1
Print QTY 1
Display P in P OFF
Caption ON/OFF OFF
Rear Panel Switches
R/G/B/Sync 75 Ohm ON
Parameter Setting
S-Video 75 Ohm OFF
NTSC/PAL Set to appropriate video format
Table 5-9 Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video

Printer Setup
Parameter Setting
Color Adj
BRT 0
CONT -8
R-Sub 0
B-Sub 0
Center OFF
Analog Adj
BRT 0
CONT 0
R-Sub 0
B-Sub 0
Center OFF
Signal Set
Input RGB

Parameter Setting
Field NML
AFC OFF
Additional
Strobe OFF
Multi: 1 for 1 OFF
Mode DIFF
Images 2
Separate ON
Print
Mode L (large)
Grad ECHO
APT H1
Comment OFF
Mirror OFF
System
Size USER
H-Posi 0
Copy OFF
Top -8
Bottom 10

Parameter Setting
Left -16
Right 6
Page Inc ON
Live Sel DIGITAL
Convert ON
Buzzer ON
Rear Panel Switch Settings
IMPEDANCE - RGB 75 Ω
IMPEDANCE - SYNC HIGH
Table 5-10 Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer

Memory SW Menu Control Settings Setup
Parameter Setting
Time
Month Not used with ultrasound systems.
Date
Year
Hour
Minute
Second
Parameter Setting
Key Set
KEY LOCK OFF
MEM&PRN ON
MEM&STOP OFF
MEM&MON OFF
PRINT&CLR OFF
CLEAR KEY ONE
Signal Set
IN Sync 0.3 V
OUT Sync 0.3 V
Sync NEGA
RGB SOG OUT OFF
H Start NML
Spcl Timing OFF
MON R-Sub 0
MON B-Sub 0
Print Set
PRN DIR NML
PRN Speed NML
Margin Cut OFF
Parameter Setting
V Position 34
Echo Gamma Adj. a: (64, 0)
b: (128, 0)
c: (192, 0)
System Setting
PRG All Init OFF
Baud Rate 9600
Remote Busy H
Table 5-11 Mitsubishi CP800 Color Video Printer Setup
Parameter Setting
COLOR ADJ
BRT -8
CONT -4
R-Sub 0
G-Sub 0
B-Sub 0
Center [>]
ANALOG ADJ
(Continued)
Parameter Setting
Color N/A
Tint N/A
BRT 0
CONT 0
R-Sub 0
B-Sub 0
Center [>]
INPUT
Input RGB
ADDITIONAL
Multi OFF
Buzzer TONE 1
PRINT
Mode AUTO
Grad ECHO
GAMMA ADJ
Color ALL
Hi 0
Mid 0
Low 0
(Continued)
Parameter Setting
Low Point 64
Mid Point 128
Hi Point 192
Apt N
Com OFF
Mirror OFF
Comment [>]
SIZE/TIMING
H-Posi 0
H-Start NOR
Size WIDE
Signal Set 1
Field NML
AFC OFF
Sync EXT
R-SUB 0
B-SUB 0
Signal Set 2
IN SYNC TTL SOG
OUT SYNC TTL
(Continued)
Parameter Setting
SYNC NEGA
RGB SOG OUT OFF
SPCL TIMING OFF
Print Set
DIR NORMAL
MARGIN CUT OFF
AUTO CUT ON
OP MODE 4P
System Set
Page Inc ON
Live Sel DIGITAL
Convert ON
Remaining OFF
Remote Set
BAUD RATE 9600
COMMAND TYPE A
RESPONSE RETURN
BUSY LEVEL H
BUSY MODE NOT PRINT
V SYNC MEM OFF
(Continued)
Parameter Setting
Previous Error
MECHA ERROR NOTHING
PRG ALL INIT OFF
Table 5-12 Codonics NP-1660 Printer Setup

Settings
Parameter CVPAPER CVTRANS DVPAPER DVFILM
TCR 0 0 - -
Gamma1 1.25 1.00 1.00 1.25
Contrast1 10 5 0 5
Anti-alias Better Better Better Better
Rotate Auto Auto Auto Auto
Scale Sharp1 Sharp1 Bilinear Sharp1
MCM 170 170 - -
DMAX1 - - - 7
1. Adjustable in the field. None of the other default settings are recommended for field adjustment.
Table 5-13 Sony UP-895MD B&W Printer Settings

Parameter Setting
Front Panel Switches
NOR/SML NOR (or user-preference)
STD/SIDE STD (or user-preference)
POSI/NEGA POSI (or user-preference)
BRIGHT 8
CONTRAST 6
Paper Tray Switches
SHARPNESS III for sharpest print
GAMMA II for standard print
PAPER TYPE V for UPP-110 HG paper
(hi-gloss)
SMOOTHING OFF (Can be set to ON for higher
density, slower prints.
Rear Panel Switches
1 through 5 Down
6 Up
7 through 12 Down
Table 5-14 P91W(A) Printer Front Panel Control Settings

Switch Function Setting
BRIGHT Adjusts print brightness -3
CONTRAST Adjusts print contrast -2
GAMMA Adjusts the gamma curve 5
PRT SIZE Changes the print size Normal
Table 5-15 P91W(A) Printer Rear Panel Switch Settings
Switch Function1 Setting

1 Impedance OFF (HIGH)
2 Trap ON
3 Gain OFF
4 Image OFF (POSI)
5 AFC OFF
6 DIR OFF (NOR)
7 Memory OFF (FRAMA)
8 Scan OFF (UNDER)
9 Saving2 OFF
10 Paper OFF (HD)
HPOSI - DO NOT ADJUST
AFC - DO NOT ADJUST
1. Refer to the P91W(A) Operation Manual (P/N 4740-0287-01) for a complete description of switch functions.
2. Switch 9 is for paper-saving mode. Install printers with the paper-saving mode turned off. If the paper-saving mode is
turned on, instruct the customer to advance the paper before removing the print; otherwise, the patient data will be cut
off the top of the print.
Table 5-16 Sony UP890 Video Printer

Parameter Setting
Front Panel
Print Size Normal
Contrast 10:00
Brightness 11:30
Thru/EE Switch EE
STD/SIDE STD
Rear Panel
Dip Switches All ON
GAMMA II
Paper Type IV
Table 5-17 Aspect Multi-Image Camera

Parameter Setting
Brightness 35
Contrast 45
Polarity +
Table 5-18 System Setups for Video Printers and
Aspect MIC
Parameter Setting
Use Print Button To Print Local (Internal)
Environment Print All
Print Color Images to B&W Yes
Printer
Store to Optical Disk During OFF
Exam
Final Inspection 1. Perform a Pre-Installation Inspection if one was not previously completed. Record all
and pertinent information on the Pre-Installation and Installation FSRs.
Documentation 2. Verify electrical power quality using the system and its peripherals as the final load.
Also compare your pre-install observations of ambient temperature, RFI, and ESD
conditions to present conditions. Record all measurements and observations on the
Installation FSR.
3. Insert Manual Changes and Operating Notes into the system Reference Manual.
Have the Operating Instructions and the Reference Manual available for review with
the system operator so that questions can be answered during the system presenta-
tion.
4. Complete a Quality Assurance Audit (PM) sticker and attach it to left side of the mon-
itor.
5. Tell the facilities representative the system is installed and ready for any safety tests
they normally conduct.
System When the system and the customer documents are ready, present them to the operators
Presentation using the following in-service procedure.
1. Review the Customer Order Acknowledgement (COA) with the customers to familiar-
ize them with the system and its options and to assure them that they have received
what they ordered.
2. Present and overview the System Manuals CD or printed operator manuals. Describe
these publications and emphasize that all information needed to operate the system
and peripherals is in them.
3. Show the operators how to turn on the system and any external OEMs. Explain the
differences between the main circuit breaker and the On/Standby switch.
4. Describe the initialization process and explain the system programs in this process.
5. Explain the reasons for the following cautions:
CAUTIONS • Always place the system ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY for five to ten seconds
before setting the system I/O circuit breaker to OFF.
• Always wait five to ten seconds after placing the system ON/STANDBY switch to
STANDBY before placing the switch back to ON. A power-down sequence, similar to
the initialization that occurs when power is first turned on, saves certain operating
parameters and then turns off power supplies in a sequential order.
• This equipment contains components that are electrostatic sensitive. Proper static
procedures, protection, and equipment must be used prior to opening and during
handling of this equipment. Failure to use ESD procedures will cause damage to
these components. Such damage to components is not covered by Philips warranties.
6. Explain why it is important for them to never remove covers from the system because
of ESD and warranty considerations.
7. Once the system is fully initialized, give the operators a brief demonstration of system
controls. Limit the discussion of the MENU buttons to the concept that pull-down
menu boxes contain higher level commands for the functions selected by the mode
buttons. Review the following:
• How to set Time and Hospital Name
• How to enter patient data
• Monitor Brightness/Contrast controls and default settings
• Mode buttons
• Rotary controls
• Up/down spring-loaded control switches
• TGC slide controls
- Trackball and SELECT button; include their use with pull-down menus
- Volume control
- VCR and hardcopy device operation
- Signal ports, including scanheads
8. Describe and demonstrate the following system maintenance procedures, to be per-
formed as needed:
- Fan filter cleaning
- System cleaning
- Scanhead disinfection
- B/W printer head cleaning
- Other peripherals, as necessary
Image Set the system to the following settings for optimum image quality:
Optimization • Follow the “Monitor Adjustments” on page 173 to set the background, brightness, and
contrast.
• Center the TGC slidepots in a straight line. Then, adjust as necessary for patient
habitus. Set slidepots before setting a new TSI.
• Compression curve to C2. Lowering compression decreases image noise.
• Gray Maps and Color Maps as required by customer. (Dedicated gray maps exist for
General Imaging and Cardiac Imaging.)
• GAIN and OUTPUT as required. (Reduce to decrease artifacts.)
Completing the 1. Discuss the present status of the system with your customer and review the hardcopy
Installation prints that were taken during the system check out. Be sure to cover any environmen-
tal concerns as well, making suggestions as appropriate.
2. Ask your customer if there are any questions they may have about the new system or
Philips. Document their issues on the Installation FSR and make a commitment to fol-
low-up on them.
3. Review the customer procedures to place a service call or to call for technical assis-
tance.
4. Complete the Installation FSR.
Installation: NetLink Installation
NetLink NetLink is installed using a site disk created from the host table, device table, and device
Installation files, which are part of the Image Management system setups. The following steps sum-
marize the installation process:
1. Determine configuration information: all IP addresses, model IDs, subnet addresses
or masks, device aliases, and port numbers. Obtain the information from the network
administrator.
2. Use the configuration information and a site disk to create the host table, device table,
and device files. Use UpLink to edit, install, and copy the configuration files.
3. Verify the accuracy of the syntax of these files by selecting save and close. If there
are no errors, then the files are syntactically correct; otherwise, they are not, and the
problem is described in an error message. Edit the files, fix the syntax, and apply until
no errors occur.
4. Use the Image Management\Network Administration setups to verify the network
configuration (host table, device table, and device files). Verify the printers are dis-
played in the appropriate lists on the B/W and Color Printer setup panels.
5. Use the Network Configuration Menu to verify the ultrasound system appears in the
Ultrasound System Net ID and that all of the archive devices appear in the archive
list. After making a selection, reboot is required to assign the correct IP address to the
system.
6. Use the Image Management Network Administration setups to create a backup copy
of the configuration files on the system hard disk.
7. Select the correct printer and archive device(s). Create an exam, take several
images, and close the exam. Verify the images are printed and that the exam appears
on all archive devices.
8. If devices are to be added to the device table after the original network installation,
use the Upgrade selection or copy new configuration files.
9. Backup the network configuration files after upgrades or modifications to the host or
device tables.
Detailed instructions for installing NetLink are contained in the “Image Management”
section of the HDI 3500 Reference Manual (P/N 4703-0036-XX).
Host Table, The host table must contain the correct alias, IP address, port number, model ID, title,
Device Table, and subnet for each device on the network. The device table maps each model ID in the
and Device Files host table to a file that describes the capability of the device with that model ID. The
device files contain the capabilities of single devices that are potential network devices.
These capabilities include such things as printer type, film size, film format type, orienta-
tion, destination, and density.
Most of the attributes or capabilities listed in the device file appear as setups on the
Image Management Net Admin: B/W Printers and Color Printers system setups screens.
From these screens you can select the settings for these setups. The relationships
among the setups is dependent and logical. You must first select a printer type before the
film sizes for the printer that you select can be established.
The information in the host table, device table, and device files establishes the network
configuration. This information must be consistent, or an error message will be displayed
on the system monitor when the configuration files are saved.
The host table, device table, and device files establish the following relationships and
must be setup to reflect the network configuration:
• TCP/IP addressing for server and clients on the network
• DICOM print connections
• Print media selection
• Print media size selection
• Print film type selection
• Print orientation selection
• Print contrast and density settings
• Print format
• DICOM storage device connections
Once the network configuration has been established and set up, create a site disk by
copying the host table, device table, and device files.
Performance Tests: Introduction
6 Performance Tests
Performance tests are part of the Customer Service Quality Assurance (QA) Program.
Also included in the QA program are preventive maintenance inspections and proce-
dures for customer satisfaction.
Introduction This section contains a series of performance tests to be performed on the system fol-
lowing installation, upgrade, or repair. The purpose of these tests is to verify the correct
operation of the system hardware and firmware. The checklist included at the end of this
section can be used to ensure that all tests are performed.
The major test sections in this procedure are organized to follow a logical progression
through each of the major system modes. It is not a requirement to perform the sections
in any particular order. However, it is best to perform the tests in the proper order to pro-
mote a thorough and consistent testing process.
WARNINGS • Measurement accuracy must be verified after installation, after every repair involving
PCB or power supply module replacement, and during every preventive maintenance
inspection.
• Wrist straps should not be worn when working on a system with its power turned on.
The +5 Vdc supply is a very high-current supply. Use caution when troubleshooting.
NOTE Before performing the tests in this section, inspect the site power in accordance
with the pre-site inspection procedures.
Performance Tests: Test Equipment and Materials
Test • FSE Tool Kit (P/N 193-90003-01)

Equipment • Tissue Equivalent Phantom
and Materials - RMI Model 413 (P/N 199-12204-00)
- RMI Model 406 (P/N 4500-8920-01)
- ATL Phantom (P/N 2100-1610-02)
• ECG/Scanhead Leakage Tester (P/N 6005-0555-01)
Initial Setup
WARNING The following series of tests requires applying power to the system while protective cov-
ers are removed. Dangerous voltages are present. Use extreme caution.
The initial setup procedure consists of observing system power-up and initialization, ver-
ifying system configuration against the customer order acknowledgement (COA), and
adjusting the monitor for optimal viewing.
System Power This section verifies the status of system power supply voltages as reported by the power
Up and supply boards.
Initialization NOTE Before proceeding, refer to Section 3, “Safety”, and ‘Power Subsystem’ on
page 43, and review the discussion of the three power states (OFF, STANDBY,
and ON).
1. Turn system off and disconnect power cord before proceeding.

2. Perform the system electrical inspection as described in Section 5, “Installation”.
3. Connect an array scanhead to the system.
Performance Tests: Initial Setup
4. Turn on all OEMs prior to checking system functionality.
5. Load OEM paper or film, as required.
6. Connect the system power cord to a hospital grade AC outlet: specifically, a single
branch circuit, 15 or 20 Ampere, 120 Vac, with an isolated and insulated ground wire
(or the equivalent International circuit).
7. Set the system circuit breaker to ON (|).
8. Wait 15 seconds, then set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON.
9. Verify power indicators are illuminated on internal peripherals.
10. Turn on power to all external peripherals and verify power indicators are illuminated.
NOTE Observe the required warm-up period for each peripheral before conducting
image quality tests. Refer to the OEM manual supplied with the peripheral or the
appropriate peripheral field service manual.
11. After completion of the initialization process, verify the following:

- The scanhead connected in step 3 of this procedure is selected and enabled.
- A real-time 2D image is displayed on the monitor (Figure 6-1).
12. Throughout the performance tests, verify the following:
- The image is correctly placed on the video display.
- The LEDs associated with the buttons on the control panel are lit when that fea-
ture is activated.
- Toggle switches, slidepots, trackball, and other moveable controls operate
smoothly and efficiently.
Performance Tests: Initial Setup
Figure 6-1 Power-up Display
System Refer to ‘Show Installed Options’ on page 208 to check the installed system options
Configuration against the COA.
Monitor The following procedure is used to set up the monitor for the performance tests in this
Performance section and to check the range of contrast and brightness of the monitor. Refer to the
control locations in Figure 7-1.
NOTE Refer to ‘Monitor Adjustments’ on page 173 to adjust the monitor for imaging.
Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
1. Set the background color to midrange for all three colors (Color 1, Color 2, or
Color 3).
2. Set brightness and contrast to minimum. Verify the video display has a flat
black appearance.
3. Set contrast to maximum. Verify that the level of contrast varies.
4. Adjust the brightness of the lightbar from maximum to minimum.
5. Set the background color, brightness, contrast, and light bar intensity to the factory
default settings by simultaneously pressing and holding the up and down controls for
each parameter.
NOTES • Focus is not currently field adjustable.

• You must wait longer than 30 seconds after changing control settings on
3500-2532-XX monitors (Brightness, Contrast, and Light Bar Intensity) for the
settings to be retained in the monitor EEPROM. Turning off the monitor power
during this period will require you to reset the control settings.
• To improve the ultrasound image, see ‘Image Optimization’ on page 179.
User Interface The following tests verify various system defaults and user-selectable configuration
Tests items, and selection of scanheads and applications.
Keyboard 1. Press Text or Title. Title allows annotation entry in the upper part of screen; Text
enters characters at the cursor's active position.
2. Press each alphanumeric key and verify the appropriate character is displayed.
3. Press Shift and the arrow keys and verify the appropriate symbols are displayed.
4. Press Shift and verify the shift functions for keys with shift characters.
5. Press remaining keys and verify proper operation. For example, Backspace, Return,
Erase Text.
Installation 1. Press the Setups key and select Display.

Defaults Setup 2. Enter the appropriate Institution name, date, and time. Select the diamonds to select
desired time and date formats.
3. Exit Setups.
Patient Data 1. Press Patient Data.

2. Select New.
3. Enter your name in the New Patient field.
4. Enter the system sales order (SO) number in the ID field.
5. Enter your birth date in Date of Birth.
6. Verify your age is displayed correctly.
7. Select Previous Exam Data and Close.
8. Close the Patient Data menu.
Scanhead 1. Press the Scanhead key.

Initialization 2. Connect the following scanheads or equivalents as shipped with the system:
L12-5 (38 or 50 mm) L7-4 P4-2 or P5-2 D5CW C5-2
3. Verify the scanheads connected are correctly displayed.
4. Select the desired scanhead and scanhead application. Verify the correct scanhead
is identified at the top of the screen.
5. Verify the patient data and other information is correctly displayed and that the clock
is updating.
2D Primary 2D Gain
Controls NOTE The TGC graphic on the display does not correlate to the TGC slidepot posi-
tions. The TGC graphic on the display represents the actual curve used by the
beamformer.
1. Image the phantom while performing these steps.

2. Set all TGC slidepots to the center position.
3. Verify that adjusting the 2D GAIN from minimum to maximum moves the displayed
TGC line from a flat line at the left edge of the depth markers to a flat line at the right
edge of the display.
4. Verify that as the 2D GAIN is increased and decreased, there is a corresponding
increase and decrease in echo intensity.
5. Set 2D GAIN to mid-range.
TGC Slide Pots

1. If the TGC display is not present, press Setups, select Display, and turn TGC Display
ON. (Moving a TGC slidepot will only bring up the TGC display for three seconds.)
2. Set 2D GAIN to mid-range or higher.
3. Verify that adjusting each TGC slidepot from minimum to maximum moves the corre-
sponding portion of the displayed TGC line from the left edge of the depth markers to
the right edge of the display.
4. Verify that increasing and decreasing the TGC gain results in a corresponding
increase and decrease in echo intensity (depends on overall gain settings).
5. Set all TGC slidepots to the center position.
Focal Zones (number of focal zones)

1. Verify that pressing ZONES up increases the number of focal zones.
2. Verify that pressing ZONES down decreases the number of focal zones.
Focus
1. Verify that pressing FOCUS up moves the focal zone up.
2. Verify that pressing FOCUS down moves the focal zone down.
Depth
1. Verify that pressing DEPTH up decreases the displayed depth and that the frame rate
increases.
2. Verify that pressing DEPTH down increases the displayed depth and that the frame
rate decreases.
Output
1. Verify that pressing OUTPUT up increases the Mechanical and Thermal Indices.
2. Verify that pressing OUTPUT down decreases the Mechanical and Thermal Indices.
Top/Bottom
1. Verify that pressing TOP/BOT inverts the image top to bottom.
2. Verify that depth markers, focal zone marker, and the orientation marker invert.
3. Verify that adjusting the top TGC slide pot still controls the near field part of the image
while the image is inverted.
L/R Invert
1. Place the scanhead on the phantom with the orientation marker to the left. Verify the
image orientation marker corresponds to the orientation mark on the scanhead.
2. Verify pressing L/R INVERT switches the image and the orientation marker left to
right.
Sector Width
1. With a sector scanhead, verify that pressing SEC WIDTH down decreases the sector
width.
2. Verify the frame rate increases as the sector width is decreased.
3. Verify that pressing SEC WIDTH up increases the sector width.
4. Verify the frame rate decreases as the sector width is increased.
Zoom
1. Verify that pressing ZOOM up increases the image magnification.
2. Verify the image orientation marker repositions to the far upper left of the display.
3. Verify the depth markers re-scale with the zoomed image.
4. Verify that moving the trackball allows all portions of the image to be viewed.
5. Set the zoom to normal magnification.
6. Verify the image, image orientation marker, and depth markers return to the normal
state.
HD Zoom
1. Press HD ZOOM and verify the zoom box is displayed and that the trackball will posi-
tion the box anywhere within the image.
2. Verify that pressing SELECT fixes the position of the upper left corner of the box and
that the trackball now positions the lower right corner of the box to size it.
3. Position and size the box to surround a distinct feature (cysts or pins) within the phan-
tom.
4. Press HD ZOOM and verify the image zooms so that the area defined within the box
is displayed to fill the image.
5. Press HD ZOOM and verify the image returns to normal magnification and that the
box is no longer displayed.
Dual
1. Press DUAL and verify the sector is displayed on the left half of the display and is
updating.
2. Press UPDATE and verify another sector is displayed on the right half of the display.
3. Verify the right sector is updating and the left sector is frozen.
4. Press UPDATE to toggle the live and frozen images from the left sector to the right,
and the right sector to the left.
5. Verify that adjusting any imaging control affects only the live sector and that each sec-
tor independently retains its imaging control settings from the last time it was active.
6. Press DUAL and verify a single full size sector is displayed.
2D Secondary Initial Setup

Controls 1. Select 2D mode and the desired scanhead that supports Power Imaging.
2. Press 2D/MM to call up the 2D secondary control menu.
Gray Maps
1. Verify that selecting - or + GMap changes the gray map number, the gray scale
assignment of the gray bar, and the image data.
2. Select Close between each map selection to observe changes.
Dynamic Range
1. Select PWR IMG.
2. Select PWR from the MENU controls.
3. Verify that selecting Dyn Rng changes the menu display through the range of Low,
Med, High, and Max. Verify the range of echoes in the image display vary from high
contrast to smooth.
Chroma®
1. Select Chroma.
2. Select Chroma 1.
3. Verify that when Chroma is selected the 2D portion of the image is colorized.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for Chroma 2, Chroma 3, and Chroma 4.
5. Select Off from the 2D secondary control menu.
6. Select Close twice to return to 2D imaging.
NOTE Chroma mapping allows the assignment of colors to gray scale echo intensities.
No diagnostic claims are made for Chroma mapping. There are Chroma maps
available on the 2D/M-Mode menu.
Persistence
Verify that increasing persistence smooths the image, and mid-level echoes move in slow
motion in response to scanhead movement.
1. Press 2D/MM, select Persistence - Low, then Close.
2. Move the scanhead right and left. Note motion.
3. Press 2D/MM, select Persistence - High, then Close.
4. Move the scanhead right and left. Compare motion to the motion in step 2.
2D Line Density
1. Select the desired scanhead and application.
2. Verify that increasing line density increases the sharpness of the resolution pins dis-
played in the image.
3. Verify that increasing line density decreases the frame rate.
Frame Rate
Change frame rate and verify that increasing frame rate increases the frame rate dis-
played on the monitor.
Biopsy
1. Select a CIVT (or a fake CIVT) scanhead.
2. Select Generic and General (clinical option and Tissue Specific preset) to initialize
the scanhead.
3. Select Biopsy on the 2D/MM menu.
4. Verify the trackball moves the cursor up and down the biopsy guideline and the dis-
tance is displayed in the lower center of the screen.
5. Return to 2D/MM menu and deselect Biopsy.
2D Color Initial Setup

Primary 1. Select a scanhead.
Controls 2. Select 2D Color mode.
Color Box
1. Verify the trackball will position the Color Box anywhere within the image.
2. Verify that pressing SELECT fixes the position of the upper left corner of the box and
that the trackball now positions the lower right corner of the box to size it.
Steer (Linear Scanheads Only)

1. Press STEER. Verify the color box changes shape shifting left or right pivoting around
its center.
2. Press STEER again several times. Verify the system cycles through the various
steering angles on the display.
Filter
Verify the FILTER control changes the screen annotation.
Baseline
1. Press BASELINE up and verify the baseline of the color bar moves to the top of the
color bar and that the color scale updates accordingly.
2. Press BASELINE down and verify the baseline of the color bar moves to the bottom
of the color bar and that the color scale updates accordingly.
Scale
Verify that pressing SCALE up and down will increase and decrease the range of the
color bar scale and varies the PRF value displayed.
Priority
1. Press PRIORITY up and verify the write priority mark on the gray bar moves to the
top of the bar and color overwrites the corresponding gray shades.
2. Press PRIORITY down and verify the write priority mark on the gray bar moves to the
bottom of the gray bar and gray shades overwrite the color.
Invert
Press INVERT and verify the color bar inverts.
2D Color Initial Setup

Secondary 1. Connect any phased, curved, or linear scanhead to the system.
Controls 2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset.
3. Select Color Mode.
4. Display the color annotation.
5. Press the Color menu button.
Color Maps
1. Select Color Maps.
2. Verify that selecting each of the color maps changes the color assignment of the color
bar.
Persistence
1. Select Persistence.
2. Verify that selecting higher settings slows the color image update rate.
Line Density
Verify that selecting higher settings increases the image sharpness and lower settings
produce a higher frame rate. Selecting A displays a higher frame rate and D a lower
frame rate.
Color Display
1. Press Superkey and CDisp.
2. Verify the color bar and the image color data are not displayed.
3. Press Superkey and CDisp.
4. Verify the color bar and the image color data are displayed.
Units
Verify that selecting FREQ or VEL changes the scaling annotation of the color bar.
NOTE Units do not apply to Power mode.
Doppler Primary Initial Setup

Controls 1. Select PULSED.
2. Verify the Doppler image information is displayed.
3. Select and initialize the L12-5 scanhead (L10-5 can also be used).
4. Press UPDATE.
5. Verify the Doppler display is scrolling.
Wall Filter
Press FILTER up and verify the wall filter annotation changes from low to medium to
high.
Baseline
Press BASELINE up and down to verify the Doppler baseline can be positioned from the
top to the bottom of the scale.
Scale
Press SCALE up and down to verify the range displayed on the Doppler scale changes
and the PRF changes.
Angle Correction
1. Press 0/60° and verify the M-line changes from +60° to -60° to 0°.
2. Press ANG COR. Verify the M-line moves and the annotation graphics update by 2°
increments.
Sample Volume Size

Press SV SIZE and verify the displayed sample volume changes size and the annotation
is updated with the new size.
Steer (Linear Scanheads Only)

Press STEER and verify the system cycles through each of the steering angles and the
M-line pivots around the sample volume.
NOTE Position the M-line near the center of the image to see each of the three steering
angles.
Invert
Press INVERT and verify the Doppler spectral data and the scale inverts relative to the
baseline.
Volume
1. Obtain a spectral trace.
2. Press VOLUME up or down and verify the speaker volume increases and decreases.
3. Verify frequencies above the center frequency emanate from the left speaker and
headphone, and frequencies below the center frequency emanate from the right
speaker and headphone.
Doppler NOTE Obtain a Doppler image (phantom or live) while performing the tests in this sec-
Secondary tion. Obtain the Doppler phantom from the customer.
Controls
Initial Setup
1. Connect any phased, curved, or linear scanhead to the system.
2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset.
3. Select PULSED.
4. Press the DOPPLER menu button to display the Doppler secondary control menu.
Doppler Gray Maps

1. Select Gray Maps.
2. Verify that selecting each of the gray maps changes the grayscale assignment of the
Doppler data.
3. Verify the selected grayscale map is displayed in the Doppler annotation.
Scale Units
Verify the Doppler scale displays the scale units selected.
Doppler Sweep Speed

1. Select each Doppler sweep speed.
2. Verify the right to left display movement (sweep speed) changes accordingly.
Display Format
1. Select the Small, Medium, and Large display formats and verify the Doppler display
changes accordingly.
2. Select 2D.
M-mode Initial Setup

Primary 1. Connect any phased, curved, or linear scanhead to the system.
Controls 2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset.
3. Select M-mode.
M-Line
Verify the trackball smoothly moves the M-line from the left image edge to the right image
edge.
M-mode Initial Setup

Secondary Press 2D/MM to display the 2D/M-mode secondary control menu.
Controls
Sweep Speed
1. Select Speed.
2. Verify that as higher settings are selected, the M-mode display rate increases.
Performance Tests: Image Quality
Display Format
Select the Small, Medium, and Large display formats and verify the M-mode display
changes accordingly.
Image Quality
2D 2D Penetration
1. Select a scanhead and TSI you wish to test.
2. Set DEPTH and FOCUS depth to maximum.
3. Scan the phantom to obtain an image that clearly shows both the horizontal and ver-
tical rows of pins. Position the scanhead for optimal image of pins.
4. Press FREEZE.
NOTE Always apply the phantom reference value and tolerance to the measurement.
5. Select Distance and set the distance caliper at the deepest vertical position where the
scatter echoes start to break up and tissue definition is lost.
6. Press Distance again to display the numerical value of penetration.
7. Verify scanhead and system performance to expected values of scanhead and set-
tings used.
2D Axial and Lateral Resolution

1. Adjust the position of the scanhead on the phantom to obtain an image that clearly
shows both the horizontal and vertical rows of pins.
2. Verify the image presents a uniform homogeneous echo pattern from the point of
closest focus to the limit of penetration.
3. Adjust the focal zone position to correspond to the depth of a cyst at the depth of your
desired measurement (depending on the scanhead and presets selected).
4. Verify the cystic structure at the focal zone is echo free,
1mm round, and with sharp wall definition.
5. Obtain an optimal phantom image of a set of graduated
3mm resolution pins within the focal zone. Refer to the diagram
2mm (left). Distances between pins may vary by phantom model.
1mm
.5mm Reference your phantom user manual for measurement
details.
6. To determine axial resolution, use the values indicated in
the left column. The first adjacent pins that display a space
between them on your image is considered resolved.
- Example: If the phantom image displays white between the second and third pins
from the bottom, the axial resolution is 1mm.
7. To measure lateral resolution, use the calipers to measure the width of a pin at the
focal zone depth. It will always measure wider than the actual pin diameter.
2D Spatial Resolution and Measurement Accuracy

Phantom elements should appear on the display relative to their actual location on the
phantom, and the system calipers should accurately measure them.
1. Adjust the position of the selected scanhead on the phantom to obtain an image that
clearly shows both the horizontal and vertical rows of pins.
2. Press FREEZE.
3. Using the system calipers, measure the distance between the centers of two pins that
are vertically spaced apart. Select pins that are near and far, not adjacent pins.
4. Measure the distance between the centers of two pins that are horizontally spaced
and compare to your phantom specifications.
Cineloop Manual Playback

1. Slowly slide the scanhead across the phantom.
2. Press FREEZE.
3. Verify the trackball movement left or right scrolls through the captured Cineloop
frames.
Cineloop Automatic Playback

1. Display the Cineloop menu.
2. Verify the Play/Pause starts and pauses Cineloop, and the image data indicates
Loop.
3. Verify that selecting Sweep/Loop changes between sweep and loop mode, and the
image data reflects the current mode selected.
4. Verify that selecting + Speed increases the playback speed.
5. Verify that selecting - Speed decreases the playback speed.
6. Verify that selecting Trim displays the Cineloop trim graphic.
7. Verify the trackball and SELECT allow positioning of both trim markers.
8. Verify that selecting Play/Pause loops through the frames defined by the trim mark-
ers.
Annotation
1. Connect a P4-2 scanhead to the system.
2. Select the Adult Card/General optimized preset.
3. Press Body Marker and verify a body marker is displayed. Press again and verify the
system scrolls through the various body markers.
4. Use the trackball to position the body marker anywhere within the image.
5. Press Superkey and SH Pos. Verify the scanhead marker is displayed on the body
marker.
6. Use the trackball to position the scanhead marker anywhere within the body marker.
7. Press Superkey and SH Pos. Verify the scanhead marker is rotated.
8. Press Erase Screen. Verify the body marker and scanhead marker are cleared from
the display.
9. Press Title to display the cursor in the default home position. Enter data into the title
field.
10. Press Erase Text. Verify the text disappears from the display.
11. Press Text to display the cursor in the default home position. Enter data into the title
field.
12. Press Erase Text. Verify the text disappears from the display.
13. Press Title to exit the annotation function.
Color Power Initial Setup

Angio 1. Connect an L12-5 scanhead to the system.
2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset.
3. Select Power Imaging Mode.
4. Obtain an image that clearly shows fluid flow.
5. Verify the power imaging background is of uniform texture and color.
6. Verify the colorized Doppler information is displayed within the vessel.
7. Display the PWR secondary menu.
Power Maps
1. Select Power Maps.
2. Verify that selecting each of the color maps changes the color assignment of the color
bar and the power imaging background.
Persistence
1. Select Persistence.
2. Verify that selecting higher settings slow the color image update rate.
Line Density
Verify that selecting higher settings increases the image sharpness and lower settings
produce a higher frame rate. Selecting A displays a higher frame rate and D a lower
frame rate.
3D CPA
1. Adjust the scanhead position to obtain an image that clearly shows fluid flow.
2. Press 3D UNCAL and acquire data.
3. Press FREEZE.
4. Press 3D/CINE to display the Cineloop secondary menu.
5. Select Create 3D or press 3D CAPTURE.
6. Verify the system indicates it is rendering a 3D image.
7. When rendering is complete, verify the system is sweeping through the 3D Cineloop.
8. Press FREEZE.
Simultaneous Initial Setup
Modes 1. Connect an L12-5 scanhead to the system.
2. Select the Cerebrovascular/Carotid optimized preset.
Simultaneous 2D + PW Doppler
1. Select PULSED.
2. Press DOPPLER MENU to display the Doppler secondary control menu.
3. Select 2D Update.
4. Select Simul.
5. Verify both 2D and Doppler are active.
Simultaneous 2D + PW Doppler + Color

1. Select Color mode.
2. If the Doppler secondary control menu is not displayed, press DOPPLER MENU.
4. Select Simul.
5. Verify the 2D, Doppler, and Color are active.
Simultaneous 2D + PW Doppler + CPA

1. Press PULSED.
2. If the Doppler secondary control menu is not displayed, press DOPPLER MENU.
4. Select Simul.
5. Select 2D mode.
6. Select Power Imaging.
7. Verify the 2D, Doppler, and CPA are active.
PW Doppler 1. Connect a P4-2 scanhead to the system.

Noise Bands 2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset.
3. Select Doppler mode.
4. Set the system controls as indicated in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 PW Doppler Noise Band Control Settings
Control Setting
Output Maximum
Sample Volume Depth 9.0 cm
Sample Volume Size 1.5 mm
5. Reduce the Doppler gain until the background noise disappears.

6. Observe the spectral display for noise bands.
7. Obtain a Doppler spectral trace.
8. Increase and decrease the PRF and observe the display for noise bands.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 for sample volume sizes of 2, 3, and 5 mm.
Steered CW 1. Connect a P4-2 scanhead to the system.

Doppler Noise 2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset.
Bands 3. Select Doppler mode.
4. Set the system controls as indicated in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Steered CW Doppler Noise Band

Control Settings
Control Setting
Output Maximum
Sample Volume Depth 9.0 cm
5. Press CW.
6. Press UPDATE.
7. Adjust the Doppler gain to obtain clearly visible background noise in the scrolling dis-
play.
8. Adjust the D-line 15 degrees around the centerline of the 2D image to locate the posi-
tion that produces the most CW noise.
9. Adjust the Doppler gain according to Table 6-3 and verify the spectral display is clear
of noise bands.
10. Repeat this procedure using the P5-3 scanhead.
Table 6-3 CW Doppler Gain Control Settings for
Noise Band Tests
Doppler Gain
PRF (Hz) P4-2 P5-3
41667 53 52
31250 56 55
25000 59 58
Table 6-3 CW Doppler Gain Control Settings for
Noise Band Tests (Continued)
Doppler Gain
PRF (Hz) P4-2 P5-3
20000 61 61
15625 65 65
14286 66 66
11905 69 69
10000 72 72
8333 75 75
5000 83 83
3731 86 86
2500 93 93
1515 95 95
DiskLink Begin Exam

1. Press Patient Data.
2. Select New.
3. Enter your name in the name field.
4. Press Patient Data to begin the new exam.
Storing Black and White Images

1. Press PRINT to store the image to the hard disk.
2. Verify the system freezes the image.
3. Verify the system beeps.
4. Verify the system unfreezes the image.
5. Verify the Page Format Graphic and the Print Store Nonessential Annotation indi-
cates a black and white image has been stored.
6. Press FREEZE.
7. Press PRINT to store six additional images.
8. Press DEL IMG.
9. Select Delete.
cates the last black and white image has been deleted.
Storing Color Images

1. Select Color mode.
2. Increase the Color gain until color pixels are displayed.
3. Press PRINT to store the image to the hard disk.
4. Verify the system freezes the image.
5. Verify the system beeps.
6. Verify the system unfreezes the image.
cates a color image has been stored.
8. Press FREEZE.
9. Press PRINT to store six additional images.
10. Press DEL IMG.
11. Select Delete.
cates the last color image has been deleted.
13. Press END EXAM.
Reviewing Images
1. Press NET/DISK.
2. Select Hard Disk to display the exam directory on the hard disk.
3. Verify the information entered for the exam just completed is correct.
4. Select the exam just completed.
5. Select Review Images.
6. Select the Zoom Graphic on one of the stored images.
7. Verify the image is displayed in one-on-one format.
8. Select Meas/Edit.
9. Verify the image appears like a normal acquisition screen.
10. Press REVIEW.
11. Verify the image is displayed in multi-image format.
Copying Images
1. Begin a new exam.
2. Press PRINT to store an image.
3. Press END EXAM.
4. Insert a formatted optical disk in the system drive.
5. Press REVIEW.
6. Select Exam Dir to display the list of exams on the hard disk.
7. Select the last exam.
8. Select Copy To, then select OK to copy the exam to the optical disk.
9. Display the Exam Directory on the optical disk.
10. Select the exam just copied to the optical disk.
11. Select Copy To, then select OK to copy the exam to the hard disk.
12. Display the Exam Directory on the hard disk.
13. Select the exam just copied to the hard disk.
14. Select Review Images.
15. Verify the image quality of each of the images is the same and the image quality has
not degraded.
Printing Copied Images

2. Select New. Do not enter data in the Name or ID fields.
4. Display the Exam Directory on the hard disk.
5. Delete the exams created for this test.
6. Display the Exam Directory on the optical disk.
7. Delete the exams created for this test.
8. Press Setups.
9. Select Image Management.
10. Select Printer Selection to display the Image Management Printer setup display.
11. Set the printer setup options as indicated in Table 6-4.
Table 6-4 Image Management Printer Setup Options

Option Setting
B&W Film Format 2-on-1
Color Film Format 4-on-1
Printed Image Destination B/W to B/W Printer,
Color to Color Printer
NOTE If Printed Image Destination is set to All to B/W Printer, the images stored to the
optical disk will be black-and-white images only.
12. Select Setups Directory.

14. Select General Options.
15. For the “Store Images During Exam” option, select “At End of Exam.”
16. Select Close.
17. Press NET/DISK and eject the optical disk by selecting Eject Disk.
NetLink 1. Press Setups.

3. Select Printers.
4. Select Color or B&W print destination.
5. Select Close.
7. Select New.
8. Enter your name in the name field.
10. Scan an RMI 413, RMI 406, or an ATL phantom.
11. Save the image and the exam.
12. Press END EXAM to end the exam.
13. Press PRINT and verify the image has been printed on the network printer.
ECG Test Setup and Heart Rate

1. Connect a P4-2 scanhead to the system.
2. Select the Adult Card/General preset.
3. Connect the ECG cable to the system.
4. Connect the white ECG cable to the RA terminals on the ECG simulator, the black
cable to the LA terminals, and the red cable to the LL terminals.
5. Set the ECG simulator settings as indicated in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 ECG Simulator Option Settings
Option Setting
Output 2.0 mV
Rate 180 BPM
OFF/ECG/PULSE ECG
6. Verify the ECG R wave is a positive going pulse.

7. Verify the measured heart rate stabilizes at 180 BPM ±1 BPM.
8. Set the ECG simulator rate to 120.
Physio Secondary Controls

1. Display the physio secondary control menu.
2. Increase and decrease the ECG gain. Verify the amplitude of the ECG waveform
increases and decreases.
3. Increase and decrease the ECG position. Verify the vertical position of the ECG
waveform moves up and down on the display.
4. Select Configure.
5. Set Trigger A and Trigger B to on.
6. Slowly increase and decrease the A Delay. Verify the A Trigger above the ECG wave-
form moves to the right and left.
7. Slowly increase and decrease the B Delay. Verify the B Trigger above the ECG wave-
form moves to the right and left.
8. Position both triggers so they are clearly visible.
9. Press UPDATE to enable trigger mode.
10. Slowly slide the scanhead across the phantom and verify the image is updated at
each trigger.
11. Slowly slide the scanhead across the phantom again, then press FREEZE.
12. Verify the Trackball movement left or right scrolls the Cineloop marker along the ECG
waveform and the image is updated as the marker crosses each trigger.
13. Press FREEZE and verify the image updates continuously.
14. Select M-mode.
15. Center the ECG waveform in the vertical center of the M-mode display.
18. Observe the ECG waveform. Press FREEZE as soon as a new QRS waveform is dis-
played.
Meas Secondary Controls

1. Display the Meas secondary control menu.
2. Select Time/Slope.
3. Position the cursor on a distinct point on the QRS waveform and press SELECT.
4. Position the second cursor on the corresponding location on the next QRS waveform
to the left or right.
5. Verify the measured time interval is 2.00s ±0.04s.
6. Press DEL MEAS.
7. Disconnect the ECG simulator.
Multiplane TEE Refer to the Multiplane TEE Scanhead Service Manual (4730-0292-02) to determine
Scanhead Face whether the particular ultrasound system and scanhead are capable of detecting a scan-
Temperature head over-temperature condition.
ISEM Tests System Setup

1. Press SETUP.
2. Select Peripheral from the Directory of Setups Options.
3. Set the Internal Printer option to Select Sony Color.
4. Exit Setups.
5. Connect a cardiology (P4-2) scanhead to the system.
6. Select the Adult Card/General preset.
7. Select 2D Color mode.
8. Display a large color box filled with color.
ISEM Setup
1. Verify the system LED is lit on the video control box.
2. Select Stress Echo as the video source. Verify the ISEM menu bar is displayed above
a blue screen, and the Stress Echo LED is lit.
3. Select Digital/Live. Verify the system video is displayed.
4. Select Setup on the Menu Bar.
5. Select Input Source.
6. Verify the video source options are as indicated in Table 6-6.
Table 6-6 ISEM Video Source Settings
Parameter Setting
Video Source RGB
Video Sync Type Composite
ECG Source Hidden
Machine Type HDI 3500
7. Select OK.
8. Select Setup on the menu bar, then select Video Calibration.
9. Set the video calibration settings as indicated in Table 6-7.
Table 6-7 ISEM Video Calibration Settings
Parameter Setting
Audible ECG On
ECG Threshold 23%
Brightness 60%
Contrast 50%
Graphics 68%
10. Select OK.
11. Select Setup on the menu bar, then select Control Panel.
12. Set the date and time setup options as indicated in Table 6-8.
Table 6-8 ISEM Date and Time Setup Options
Parameter Setting
Date Format Month-Day-Year
Time Current Time
Date Current Date
Mouse Tracking Speed Default Value
13. Click Done to close the Control Panel window.

14. Press CNTL+N to begin a new patient.
15. Enter your name into the name field.
16. Enter a made-up ID number into the ID field.
17. Select OK.
ISEM Footswitch
1. Press ALT+A and select Page-full, then OK. Verify the footswitch icons are displayed.
2. Press the left footswitch and verify the system indicates the images are being cap-
tured.
3. Press the middle footswitch and verify the system indicates it is preparing the image
for storage.
4. Press the right footswitch and verify the footswitch icons and the status bar disappear.
ISEM Hand Controller

1. Press ALT+A and select Page-full, then OK. Verify the footswitch icons are displayed.
2. Press the key on the hand controller and verify the system indicates the
images are being captured.
3. Press the key on the hand controller and verify the system indicates it is pre-
paring the image for storage.
4. Capture several more images.
5. Press the key on the hand controller and verify the footswitch icons and the
status bar disappear.
6. Select 2D mode.
Image Review
1. Select Patient Files, then select Patient Directory.
2. Select a patient name.
3. Select Load.
4. Verify the menu bar indicates image x of y, where x is the image number and y is the
number of images captured.
5. Press the left and right arrow keys on the hand controller to sequence through the
images. Verify each of the images accurately reflects the system image.
Hard Disk Clean-up

1. Select Display, then select Close all Collections.
2. Select Patient Files, then select Patient Directory and OK.
NOTE Do not delete the patient files named “TEST, NTSC (or PAL), and Monitor Setup.
3. Highlight the patient entries created during this test, then select Delete and OK.
4. Verify the selected files have been deleted.
5. Select Cancel.
6. Select System as the video source. Verify the system monitor is no longer displaying
ISEM video, and the System LED is lit.
OEM Tests OEMs are only tested for basic functionality and their interface to the system.
VCR
1. Press COLOR.
2. Press RECORD and verify the VCR begins recording.
3. Record several minutes of image data and audio.
4. Rewind the cassette and press PLAY.
5. Verify the playback image is stable.
6. Adjust Doppler gain and color gain. Verify color hue and intensity are adjusted on the
monitor.
7. Verify the audio plays back.
8. Pause the image during playback.
9. Verify the paused image is stable.
10. While in the Pause mode, verify the VCR will search forward and reverse where the
speed of the search is dependent on the directional movement of the VCR search
control.
11. Verify the positive flow audio is on the left speaker, and the negative flow is on the
right speaker.
12. Verify the audio volume can be varied with the volume control.
13. Press STOP on the VCR.
14. Press VCR CTRL and verify operation of the softkeys.
15. Press EJECT on the VCR.
B/W Video Printer

Verify that pressing PRINT initiates a B/W hardcopy print.
Color Video Printer

1. Select Color Doppler mode and obtain a color image.
2. Press PRINT to take a print.
3. Verify the print LED blinks when PRINT is pressed, and 45 to 90 seconds later, blinks
again three times to indicate completion of print (refer to the color printer service
manual).
4. Verify the prints have the correct image size, blanking, and color reproduction.
Multi-image Camera
1. Acquire an image using a tissue equivalent phantom.
2. Set the system depth, TGC, and gain controls to mid-range. Adjust the 2D maps to
achieve a mid-level gray.
3. Press FREEZE.
4. Take a print of a positive 2D image and a print of a scrolling video display (M-mode or
Doppler).
5. Take six exposures for each sheet of film. After the sixth exposure, verify the camera
alternately displays “Complete” then “Remove Cassette”.
6. Re-install the dark slide with the black border of the dark slide outward, and remove
the film cassette from the camera.
7. Process the film and verify the following:
a. There is no video blanking visible within 1.0 mm of any image border.
b. The graybar transitions evenly from white to black.
c. The print graphics are clear, legible, and not cut off.
d. The print density is even throughout the print.
e. There are no fogging, chemical marks, roller scratches, smudges, or light leaks.
Performance Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Test Checklist Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Video Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Control Panel Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Menu controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Dedicated pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Miscellaneous controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
2D Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Gain, Output, and Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
2D Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Biopsy Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Cineloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Save-Recall Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Color Power Angio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
2D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Color Capture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Spectral Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Pulsed Doppler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Spectral Doppler Auto Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Simultaneous Spectral Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
M-Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Simultaneous M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Dual M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
HD Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
DiskLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
NetLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
ECG/Physio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Heart Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Phased Array Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Scanhead Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Focal Zones and Focal Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Sector Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Linear Array Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Curved Array Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Multi-plane TEE Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Internal Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Multi-Image Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
ISEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
External Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Rear Panel Port Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Miscellaneous Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Microphone and Audio Dub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
Adjustments: Power Supply Voltage Adjustments
7 Adjustments
Power Supply There are no power supply voltage adjustments. The voltages can be measured on the
Voltage PSM rear panel. Refer to Section 9, “Troubleshooting”, for the test point locations. If a
voltage is out of tolerance, the system will not automatically shut down, but may attempt
Adjustments
to cycle power continuously, until the system is manually shut off, and the PSM is
replaced. Voltages are monitored by the FEC.
Monitor The HDI 3500 has FIMI or Microvitec (MV) designed monitors. The same external con-
Adjustments trols are used to adjust the display, but there are slight differences in the displayed
menus. The FIMI monitor has more contrast range and a background tint function, while
the Microvitec (MV) has an extra background balance setting.
Monitor field adjustments include contrast, brightness, color background, and lightbar.
Refer to Figure 7-1 for control locations. Additional field adjustments are available on the
FIMI monitor through a menu selection, see “To access FIMI monitor menus:” on
page 175. Additional adjustments for the MV monitor require special tools and test instru-
ments and are not field adjustable.
NOTE See also “Monitor Performance” on page 132
The adjustment settings are retained in an EEPROM in the monitor. Microvitec has a
delay of 30 seconds between the time the adjustment is made and the time the settings
are stored. If the ultrasound system is powered down before the MV monitor has stored
the new settings, the previous control settings are used when the monitor is powered up.
When a control is pressed, the current control setting is displayed for approximately 3
seconds. The following procedure will work for either monitor.
Adjustments: Monitor Adjustments
NOTE The following Monitor adjustment procedure applies to both the FIMI and
Microvitek monitors unless otherwise noted.
Adjusting the Adjustments can be set to factory default settings or to any setting desired by the user.
Monitor to the Factory default values are chosen to give optimal monitor display quality for most clinical
Factory Defaults applications and should satisfy most users. Default settings are recommended. Refer to
Figure 7-1 for control locations.
➤ To set monitor controls to the factory default settings:

1. Simultaneously press the up and down contrast controls twice. The default value of
80 is displayed.
2. Simultaneously press the up and down brightness controls twice. The default value of
20 is displayed for the MV monitor and 32 for the FIMI monitor.
3. Simultaneously press the lightbar controls twice to set the light intensity. MV monitor
will display a default value of 16 on the monitor. A value is not displayed on the FIMI
monitor.
4. Press the background color control to select the background color on the display.
Color 1 is the factory default option.
5. To store the factory default settings in the MV monitor EEPROM, wait more than 30
seconds before powering down the system or operating the VCR controls. There is no
delay required for the FIMI monitor.
NOTE The setting changes will not be saved if the system is turned off during the
30-second period or if the system operating mode is changed from real-time
imaging to VCR playback. The delay is required because the settings are saved
in a monitor EEPROM and there is a limit as to the number of times data can be
reliably stored in the EEPROM.
Adjusting the This procedure optimizes the image on the monitor. It does not impact ultrasound imag-
Monitor for ing quality. Refer to “Image Optimization” on page 179, or “Imaging” in the HDI 3500 Get-
Optimal Viewing ting Started Manual, to optimize the ultrasound image.
➤ To adjust the monitor for optimal viewing:

1. Set all the monitor settings to default values first, see “Adjusting the Monitor to the
Factory Defaults” on page 174.
2. Set background color to Color 1 for General Imaging and Color 2 for Cardiology appli-
cations. (Color 1 adds a blue tint to the background, Color 2 is neutral, and on the MV
monitor Color 3 adds a red tint.) The FIMI monitor has colors 1 and 2, which are
equivalent to 1 and 2 on the MV monitor.
3. Press contrast up and down controls to optimize the display to user preference.
4. Adjust the lightbar intensity to user preference.
NOTE To retain the monitor settings, the Microvitec monitor requires a 30-second wait
after setting controls before powering down.
➤ To access FIMI monitor menus:

1. Power off the system.
2. Power on the system while simultaneously pressing the contrast up and down con-
trols on the monitor control panel. (Press for 5 seconds)
3. Press the color select control. A Main Menu is displayed.
4. Press the contrast and brightness up and down controls to select menu functions.
5. Parameters including image size, centering, and aspect are available for fine adjust-
ments. Follow menu prompts to make monitor adjustments or to check firmware ver-
sion and operational hours.
6. Exit the menu. Changes are saved after exiting the menu.
NOTE Do not select Service Menu items. Special factory equipment is required to
make adjustments in the Service Menu.
Adjusting The monitor focus adjustment is seldom made in the field. If image quality is poor, the
Monitor Focus monitor is usually replaced. If field-adjustment is necessary, take care to follow the proce-
dure below.
➤ To adjust monitor focus:

1. Remove the monitor cover.
2. Locate the focus adjustment (Figure 7-1).
CAUTION Do not adjust G2 (Grid 2) voltage to the left of the focus adjustment. Doing so will
adversely impact monitor image quality and performance and may not be field-correct-
able.
3. Adjust monitor focus as needed.

4. Replace the monitor cover.
Lightbar brightness
Background color selection
Monitor brightness
Monitor contrast
Focus adjustment
G2 adjustment
(Do not adjust)
Figure 7-1 Monitor Control Locations

Adjustments: Trackball Adjustment
Trackball If the trackball rotates too easily the cursor may move unexpectedly during image anno-
Adjustment tation. Also, loss of Doppler data may occur if trackball movement repositions the Dop-
pler sample volume cursor during Doppler imaging. The 2100-1480-03 Trackball
Assembly (introduced in April 2002) incorporates shims to adjust trackball movement.
The -02 and older trackballs are not adjustable.
➤ To adjust the tension on the (2100-1480-03) trackball:

1. Remove the upper and lower user interface assemblies by performing step 1 through
step 4 of “Control Panel PCBs and On/Standby Switch” on page 219.
2. Verify the trackball part number is -03.
3. Remove the trackball retaining bracket and trackball assembly. Note the orientation of
the cable exiting from the trackball.
4. Verify the trackball moves freely and has a snug protective seal. The -03 trackballs
will typically be shipped with two shims installed. Remove one shim to decrease the
pressure of the lip seal against the ball.
a. Adjust the tension on the trackball by turning the trackball seal ring counterclock-
wise to loosen or clockwise to tighten. Wear a surgical glove to enhance your grip
on the plastic ring. In some cases, it may be necessary to remove the upper hous-
ing to facilitate removal of the retaining ring.
b. If the trackball movement is difficult, remove spacer rings by disassembling the
trackball and removing rings as required.
5. Ensure the ring is parallel with the upper housing, place the ring on the housing and
carefully turn clockwise to tighten. Stop immediately if there is any sign of binding: the
threads can be cross-threaded very easily. Turn the ring by hand until snug against
the upper housing.
Adjustments: Image Optimization
CAUTION Do not over-tighten. If you encounter difficulty replacing the retaining ring without bind-
ing, it may be necessary to remove the upper housing to aid making correct alignment of
the ring to the housing and eliminate the effects of ball pressure against the lip seal.
6. Reassemble the user interface assembly.

7. Install the upper and lower user interface assemblies and the control panel lock bar.
8. Power up the system.
9. Check the trackball for proper operation.
Image There is variation in the monitor brightness and contrast settings from user to user.
Optimization The recommendation is to set the monitor contrast to 80 and brightness to 20 for the MV
monitor and 32 for the FIMI. Higher brightness levels produce flat images. This setting
consistently provides clean images without noise. Other factors that impact image quality
are as follows:
• TGC controls
- TGC slide pots are returned to a straight line BEFORE selecting a new TSI. It is
critical to obtaining a good image and necessary to get the full range of adjust-
ment.
- Setting the TGC controls in a straight line may not result in the perfect image,
since imaging varies with anatomy. Manual manipulation is necessary to obtain an
optimal image. Optimal image for each patient may not result in a smooth TGC
ramp.
Adjustments: Image Optimization
• Dynamic Range Compression Settings
- Use the COMPRESS control to vary the Dynamic Range and the compression
curve applied. The default setting reads 130dB/C4.
- A higher compression setting reduces noise levels in the image, optimal for shal-
low imaging of high-velocity vessels.
- A lower setting increases contrast and sensitivity, optimal for deep low-velocity
vessels.
- Bring up the compression in THI to give the image a slightly more fundamental
look.
- For General Imaging situations, try bringing this down to C2, depending on the
scanning situation and personal preferences.
• Gray Maps: There are dedicated gray maps for General Imaging and Cardiac Imag-
ing. Toggle through these to find the best fit for a customer.
• Output Control: The OUTPUT control, formerly called POWER, varies the amount of
energy the scanhead emits. In certain clinical situations, reducing output may help
decrease artifacts. This is especially true for reverberation artifacts seen in vessels
and in a uterus with a posterior placenta. Reducing output may not remove them
completely, but it will improve the image. Use in conjunction with gain.
• Look for the best echo window
- Move the transducer around and take advantage of any fluid pockets or uniform
tissue present.
- Artifacts seen from one view may be entirely absent from a different window. Par-
tial volume artifacts around cystic structures are an example here. Do your best to
avoid the curving walls of cystic structures and help the customer understand this.
Preventive Maintenance: Fan Filter
8 Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance inspections are part of the Customer Service Quality Assurance
(QA) Program. Also included in the QA program are performance tests and procedures
for ensuring customer satisfaction.
Fan Filter 1. Remove the filter (PN 2950-1148-01) from under the front of the system.
2. Vacuum and reinstall the filter. If there is a spare filter, install the spare filter into the
system. Clean the dirty filter with soap and water and allow time to dry before rein-
stalling.
3. Demonstrate filter cleaning procedure to customer.
Optical Disk The recommended interval for cleaning the lens (head) internal to the (optional) optical
Drive Head disk drive is once every six months. The procedure for head cleaning is to insert a
head-cleaning cartridge (P/N 2100-1419-01) into the optical drive with power applied.
Cleaning
The head-cleaning cartridge will load, automatically clean the head, and automatically
unload when the cleaning cycle has completed (approximately 10 seconds).
The condition of the head-cleaning cartridge is important to the process. Inspect the con-
dition of the cleaning brush by opening the shutter of the cleaning cartridge. Check to
see if the tip of the cleaning brush is open. If it is, use a newer head-cleaning cartridge.
Other 1. Verify screws are securely in place on all PCB hold down tabs (PIM, CPU, ADAPTR,
Maintenance ACIM, DDEA, and IIM).
2. Verify all screws are securely in place on the Scanhead Select PCB. Tighten the
screws in the correct sequence (Figure 10-4). Do not over tighten. Damaged screws
or PEM nuts may require card cage replacement.
Preventive Maintenance: Other Maintenance
3. Check trackball operation for excessive drag or inconsistent cursor movement. Clean
and adjust the tension or replace it with an adjustable style, see “Trackball” on page
182.
4. Verify all cooling fans are operational.
5. Run the Machine Comprehensive Test, verify system functionality.
6. Check resolution, penetration, and image quality.
7. Inspect the casters as follows:
a. Inspect for signs of wear and replace if necessary.
b. Replace caster hubcaps that are missing.
c. Check that caster brakes are operational. If broken, order brake lever knob
P/N 1065-2611-02.
8. Verify the OEM bay contains no OEMs that are hard-wired to the ACIM.
9. Re-attach loose rubber bumpers and touch up paint scratches.
10. Perform other cleaning and inspection procedures per Customer Service policy.
11. Fill out a quality assurance label. Attach it to the system per Customer Service policy.
Cover the label with a label overlay:
- Label, P/N 4100-0940-01
- Overlay, P/N 4100-0941-01
Trackball ➤ To clean and adjust the trackball tension:

NOTE This procedure applies only to trackballs having adjustable tension rings
(P/N 2100-1480-03). Replace failed non-adjustable trackballs with the adjust-
able type.
1. Trackballs with removable seals can be cleaned without removing the assembly from
the control panel. Remove the seal ring with the adjustment tool as shown in
Figure 8-1, and lift the trackball out with tape or by tilting the control panel.
2. Vacuum and wipe clean the trackball and the assembly with a damp paper towel or
rag. Using solvents or cleaners is not recommended.
3. Reassemble as shown in Figure 8-1.
4. Adjust trackball seal ring with adjustment tool (P/N 2100-1657-01) until its tension is
satisfactory to the user and it operates smoothly.
5. If unable to adjust the tension so it operates smoothly, replace the assembly.
1. Unscrew seal
4. Install and tighten seal
with tool
for acceptable drag
P/N 2100-1657-01
2. Remove seal
3. Disassemble, clean and

reassemble
Figure 8-1 Cleaning the Trackball

Troubleshooting: Introduction
9 Troubleshooting
Introduction The HDI 3500 Ultrasound System contains extensive software and hardware diagnostic
capabilities. However, the system must boot up before the operator has access to diag-
nostics. This section contains information on the core bootup fault isolation procedure,
system alerts, general fault isolation, and system diagnostics.
Core Bootup The HDI 3500 System requires the following PCBs for core bootup: ACIM, PSM, AIM,
Fault Isolation UIM, IIM, PIM, PCM, SYSCPU, DDEA, and CTRBRD. It also requires the control inter-
face module cables, the video cable, and the monitor for core bootup.
NOTE Core bootup may take up to 25 minutes if there are malfunctioning PCBs or
missing PCBs.
➤ The core bootup fault isolation procedure is as follows:

1. Set the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY and circuit breaker to off. Unplug the sys-
tem power cord.
CAUTION Ensure the circuit breaker is set to off before removing PCBs.
2. Verify all card cage PCBs required for bootup (ACIM, PSM, AIM, CPANEL, IIM, PIM,
PCM, SYSCPU, and DDEA) are securely seated into the CTRBRD.
3. Verify all cables to the IIM and ACIM are properly connected.
4. Set the circuit breaker and the ON/STANDBY switch to ON.
Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
5. If the system does not boot from the hard drive, insert the backup disk into the optical
drive and attempt to boot the system from the optical drive. If the system does not
bootup, continue with step 7.
6. If the system boots up from the optical drive, replace the hard drive. The hard drive
should be loaded with 150.23 software or higher.
7. If the system does not boot from the hard drive, turn the circuit breaker to off, and
remove the PSP1, PSP2, FEC, IMEM, SSP, ADAPTR, AIFOM, CB0-3 (all Channel
Boards), SHSEL, and DOPACQ PCBs. Reboot the system.
If the system boots up with the PCBs removed, one of the removed PCBs was pre-
venting other PCBs from accessing a bus. Replace the PCBs individually until you
determine the faulty PCB.
NOTES • It will take several minutes (up to 25 minutes) for the system to boot without the
PSP1, PSP2, FEC, IMEM, SSP, ADAPTR, AIFOM, CB0-3 (all Channel
Boards), SHSEL, and DOPACQ PCBs.
• With the FEC removed, the system will turn on, but not turn off. Use the circuit
breaker to turn the system off.
8. Check the LEDs on each PCB. Refer to Figure 9-1, Figure 9-2, Table 9-1 and Table
9-2.
NOTE The system monitors the power supply enable voltages to ensure they are within
tolerance. If the voltages are not within the tolerances listed in Figure 9-3, the
system will shut down. If the system shuts down, none of the voltages will be
enabled (all voltages will be 0V). If the system shuts down because of a power
supply failure, check the PSM LEDs referring to Figure 9-1 and Table 9-2. Refer
to Figure 9-3 and Figure 9-4 for PCB voltage locations.
DS2
DS3
PS1 PS2 PS3 A1F A2F A3F A4F A5F A6F A7F A8F A9F A10FA11FA12FA13FA14F
DS4
DS5
DS6
PSM
FEC
HVDC OK
OVP TRIG
DS7
Reset switch
DS8
Figure 9-1 Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Front)

A4B PSP2 A8B IMEM A12B AIFOM HVDC to PSM
Not Used
WRITE DS1 SCIP DS1
A3B PCM DSP DS1 READ DS2 DS2
MOP Power to HVDC
IBUS DS3
ERROR HVDC output to card cage
ENET DS1
DSP DS2 A12B AIFOM
MOP DS3 IIM Not shown A
1
A A A A
2 3 4 5
A A A
6 7 8
A A A A A
9 10 11 12 13
B B B B B B B B B B B B B
(No LEDs)
SCIP DS5
A5B PSP1 ON
MOP DS6
OFF
SCIP DS1
MOP DS2 SCSI A11B SSP
A6B CPU DAD DS3

SCIP DS2
MOP DS1
SCIP DS4 TRAP DS1
MOP DS5 PAP DS2
SCIP DS3
PTX DS6 MOP DS4
PTR DS7 A2B PIM
(LEDs not visible. Located
behind PCB cover) A9B ADAPTR
Figure 9-2 Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Rear)

Table 9-1 Normal Core Bootup and PCB LED Sequence
Core Bootup Sequence Field Replaceable Unit - Visual Indication1

Main power switch off, ON/STANDBY ACIM - all LEDs off.
switch off
• AC power to ACIM
Main power switch on, ON/STANDBY ACIM - LEDs #6 and #7 are lit continuously. #6
switch off indicates power to HVDC transformer after internal
• HVDC to PSM fuse F1 (ACIM input). #7 indicates HVDC to PSM
• Logic connection made to ON/ (ACIM output). Fans are off.
STANDBY switch
Main power switch on, ON/STANDBY CPNL - LEDs lit for 5 seconds, flash 4 times, then
switch on (system power on) off
• Individual power supply voltages are PCM - DS2 flickers, 1 Hz after 5 seconds
turned on 2-3 seconds after Main PIM - DS2 flickers, 1 Hz after 5 seconds
Power switch or ON/STANDBY switch CPU - SCIP quick flash, 1 Hz after 5 seconds
is turned on SCIP flickers at 1 Hz, MOP flickers at 2 Hz
• PCBs get power and begin PCM - DS1 on, all others pulse
initializing Monitor - color test pattern, blank screen, gray
• PIM generates test pattern pattern
• CPNL, UIM, IIM, PIM, PCM data Subsystem PCBs - refer to Table 9-2 for SCIP and
path established MOP information
• HD loads applications and operating Fans - full speed for 2 seconds, 3/4 speed until
system to CPU bootup, then 1/2 speed
• CPU completes bootup
• CPU/PCM establish client/server
Table 9-1 Normal Core Bootup and PCB LED Sequence (Continued)
Core Bootup Sequence Field Replaceable Unit - Visual Indication1

System Initialization CPU - SCIP flickers at 1 Hz, MOP flickers at 2 Hz
• CPU begins loading subsystem PCM - top LED stays on, all others pulse
PCBs Monitor - ATL logo, Splash Screen
• CPU/PCM client/server operational SHSEL - relays energize. System bootup time is
• HD/DDEA completes loading approximately 1.5 minutes
applications and operating system ACIM - LED #1 flickers at 1 Hz
• IDs and configuration are checked
• System operational files loaded and
scanheads initialized
Core bootup complete Subsystem PCBs - refer to Table 9-2
• CPU using applications, SW, and Monitor - displays 2D image and static graphics
MO files, checks configuration (Static graphics displayed only if scanhead is
• CPU checks bootup error status connected to system during bootup)
• UIF enabled Fans - Fan speed depends on the card cage
temperature averaged from 4 thermistors located
on PCBs throughout the card cage. Correct fan
voltage is sent from PSM to the fans (12 Vdc - +24
Vdc)
1. The sequence described is the normal sequence of events during core bootup. If these visual indications are not
observed, refer to the Core Bootup Fault Isolation procedure.
Table 9-2 PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup
Slot
PCB Location LED Status
Card Cage, Front
PSM PS1 DS1 - HVDC OK - Normally lit. Indicates that 155 Vdc is
PS2 present to the PSM
PS3
FEC DS2 - OVP TRIG - When lit, indicates that +6 V or -6 V have
A4F higher than normal voltage, or -5.2 V current limiting has been
activated (-5.2 V circuits are drawing more than 14.3 A).
DS1 - not used
DS2 - not used
DS3 - MOP Fail - When lit, indicates MOP did not bootup
DS4 - MOP LED1
DS5 - SCIP LED2
DS6 -
DS7 -
DS8 -
Card Cage, Rear
PIM A2B DS1 - Control panel interface processor LED
DS2 - SCIP / MOP LED2
Table 9-2 PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup (Continued)
Slot
PCM A3B DS1 - Flickers when Ethernet communications with the CPU
are active
DS2 - DSP LED, flickers during image bus processing
DS3 - MOP LED1
PSP2 A4B DS1 - During power up, is momentarily on while its program is
loaded from PSP1. After bootup, is an activity indicator (glows
according to how busy the PSP2 is.) During high frame rates/
color the LED should stay lit. Flickers when scan converting
PSP1 A5B DS1 - SCIP LED2
DS2 - MOP LED1
CPU A6B DS1 through DS3 - not used
DS4 - SCIP LED2
DS5 - MOP LED1
DS6 - PTX, flickers during Ethernet communications with CPU
DS7 - PTR, flickers during Ethernet communications with CPU
DS8 through DS11 - not used
IMEM A8B DS1 - Write LED, flickers during scanning
DS2 - Read LED, flickers during scanning
DS3 - IBUS ERROR LED, is normally off
Slot
ADAPTR A9B DS1 - TRAP (Translation Processor) LED, flickers in all
scanning modes. In 2D or Doppler the rate is so fast the LED
appears constantly on. In Color the rate is visible
DS2 - PAP (Physio-Audio Processor) LED, off in all modes
DS3 - SCIP LED2
DS4 - MOP LED1
SSP A11B DS1 - MOP LED1 Will blink faster if the system is in M-mode,
Doppler, or Color. If nothing is in flash EPROMs, the LED
continues to blink at the bootup rate
DS2 - SCIP LED2 When receiving messages the LED will
flicker
DS3 - DAD LED Off after bootup. If in Doppler, the LED is on or
off. If in Color, the LED blinks at an irregular rate, unless the
system is in Freeze mode. If in M-mode, the LED blinks at a
regular rate (DAD = Data Dispatcher processor)
AIFOM A12B DS1 - not used
DS2 - not used
DS5 - SCIP LED2
DS6 - MOP LED1, Blinks at one-second intervals during
system bootup and two-second intervals when loading flash
code
Slot
ACIM PS5 DS1 - After system bootup, flashes at approximately 1 Hz.
Indicates HVDC to PSM after system bootup
DS2 - not used
DS3 - not used
DS4 - not used
DS5 - not used
DS6 - Normally lit (after system circuit breaker is set to on).
Indicates power to HVDC after internal fuse F1
DS7 - Normally lit (after system circuit breaker is set to on).
Indicates HVDC +155VDC from rectifier to PSM
1. The Module Operation Processor (MOP) controls PCB operation. The MOP LED blinks at one-second intervals during
system bootup, and at a two-second rate after bootup.
2. The Serial Communications Interface Processor (SCIP) communicates between the PCB and the CPU. The SCIP LED
blinks at one-second intervals after bootup.
Test Points Tolerances

GND
-15 V ±0.45 Vdc
+15 V
-12 V
±0.36 Vdc
+12 V
P2 -6 V
±0.12 Vdc
+6 V
-5.2 V ±0.104 Vdc
+5 V ±0.10 Vdc
GND
GND
-HV/10 -HV X 0.0991 ±2%
+HV/10 +HV X 0.0991 ±2%
FAN 0+0 +24 V
+3.3 V Not currently used
P3 ±0.10 V
REF +5 V
REF 2.5 V ±0.05 V When lit, indicates HVDC is present. HVDC OK
+5 V STBY ±0.10 V When lit, indicates over voltage OVP TRIG
+2.5 V STBY ±0.05 V protection is on or -5.2V current
GND limiting has been activated.
Figure 9-3 PSM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS1, PS2, PS3)

Troubleshooting: Alert Information
CAUTION ACIM LED 6 indicates

Remove power to the system by power to HVDC after
disconnecting the power cord and waiting internal fuse F1
15 seconds before removing or replacing (12A 25VDC FB)
power supply PCBs. Otherwise, damage
to PCBs and the Motherboard will result. ACIM LED 7
indicates HVDC
ACIM LED 1 indicates HVDC to +155VDC from
PSM when the system has booted rectifier to PSM
up. Indicator is controlled by the FEC
ACIM LEDs 2 - 5 are

not used
ACIM
Figure 9-4 ACIM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS5)
Alert Alerts indicate the system has detected a performance problem. These performance
Information problems are caused by hardware faults or by system sensitivity to a particular series of
keystrokes made by the operator. Alerts have a blue banner across the top of the dialog
box.
Troubleshooting: Alert Information
For example, if a scanhead is connected, and FREEZE is immediately pressed, the
ADAPTR PCB will not be able to respond within the appropriate time (3 seconds) and an
alert will be produced. In this case, there is no hardware fault and no parts should be
changed. Verify that this is the issue is by reviewing the error log for an ADAPTR error
directly after a scanhead connection error.
➤ To remove the alert from the display:

1. Simultaneously press Superkey and F6 (the sixth key to the right in the top row of
oval-shaped keys on the lower user interface) to display a second page of error infor-
mation (Figure 9-5).
2. Print or record the information on the second page. The second page of error infor-
mation identifies the file and the line of software code containing the error.
3. Start troubleshooting with UpLink and Diagnostics.
4. Repeat step 1 to remove the alert message from the display and to continue scanning
or other diagnostic procedures.
Troubleshooting: User Event Log
Tests and Utilities Is 0.6 MI 1.0

r #234 14.2cm
Alert
An error has been detected.
Please record the following information and

call ATL Technical Support.
Feature-Diags.zErrStdENOENT
(0104-20000002)
ERROR Subsystem Feature-Diags Errno: zErrStdENOENT (0104-20000002)

Software Version: 4252-0815-12 124.11
File: VDiagsSoftware.c Line Number: 639
Priority: Alert-ErrorBanner Date: 08/20/1998 Time: 12:09:14
ErrnoInfo: No such file or directory
UserInfo:
Test of Priority Alert.
Figure 9-5 Alert with Second Page of Information Displayed
User Event The user event log is helpful in determining the cause of system lockups by recording the
Log sequence of user events (keystrokes or control activations) that resulted in the system
lockup. The log records the last 500 keystrokes or control activations and the time they
were entered from the system control panel. The event sequence is retained even if the
system power switch and the circuit breaker are turned off. Any one of 10 pages of user
events are displayed with 50 events on each page (2 columns of 25). The user events
Troubleshooting: User Event Log
may include keystrokes, slidepot changes, control knob rotations, or trackball move-
ments.
1. Verify the system has booted up.
2. Simultaneously press and hold Superkey and Shift. Press the characters indicated in
Table 9-3 to display the user event log for the desired language. Page 10 is displayed
with the previous 50 events listed.
Table 9-3 User Event Log Language Differences
Keystrokes Required
Test English French German
User Event Log = = “spacebar”
3. Select Next on the bottom of the display to display the next page or Prev to display
the previous page. The display appears similar to Figure 9-6.
4. Select Reset Log to clear all entries from the event log.
5. To exit, select Close on the bottom of the display. The display returns to the previous
imaging mode.
Troubleshooting: Formatting Disks
User Log
08/20/98 11:47:35 Timeout 08/20/98 12:20:03 Start Diags
08/20/98 12:07:44 PushBtn OK 08/20/98 12:20:08 PushBtn OK
08/20/98 12:07:44 End ConfirmDialog 08/20/98 12:20:12 PushBtn Error Log
08/20/98 12:07:51 Superkey Diags 08/20/98 12:21:04 PushBtn Show
08/20/98 12:07:51 Start Diags 08/20/98 12:23:52 PushBtn User
08/20/98 12:07:58 PushBtn OK 08/20/98 12:23:57 PushBtn Sys.
08/20/98 12:08:06 PushBtn Tests, Utils. 08/20/98 12:24:00 PushBtn Return
08/20/98 12:08:58 PushBtn Execute 08/20/98 12:24:15 PushBtn Close
08/20/98 12:09:14 PushBtn Execute 08/20/98 12:24:22 PushBtn User Login
08/20/98 12:09:45 Button 3D 08/20/98 12:24:27 PushBtn OK
08/20/98 12:17:20 Button 3D 08/20/98 12:24:29 PushBtn Cancel
08/20/98 12:17:23 PushBtn Hide 08/20/98 12:24:32 End Diags
08/20/98 12:17:29 PushBtn Error Log 08/20/98 12:24:32 PushBtn Close
08/20/98 12:17:58 PushBtn Close 08/20/98 12:24:35 Start Menu
08/20/98 12:18:01 PushBtn Close 08/20/98 12:24:39 PushBtn UIF
08/20/98 12:18:13 End Diags 08/20/98 12:24:47 PushBtn Close
08/20/98 12:18:14 Start ProgressDialog 08/20/98 12:24:48 PushBtn Close
08/20/98 12:19:30 PowerUp -------------- 08/20/98 12:24:48 PushBtn Menu
08/20/98 12:19:40 08/20/98 12:54:50 Acquiring Freeze
08/20/98 12:19:41 Start ConfirmDialog 08/20/98 12:54:50 Timeout
08/20/98 12:19:58 ModeChange 2d 08/20/98 13:24:51 Timeout
08/20/98 12:19:58 Acquiring 2d 08/20/98 13:54:53 Timeout
08/20/98 12:19:59 PushBtn OK 08/20/98 14:14:23 Button Freeze
08/20/98 12:19:59 End ConfirmDialog 08/20/98 14:14:23 Acquiring 2d
08/20/98 12:20:03 Superkey Diags 08/20/98 14:18:43 Start UserLog
Close Reset Log Prev Next 10 of 10
Figure 9-6 User Event Log
Formatting ➤ To format a blank optical disk:

Disks 1. Boot up the system.
2. Press NET/DISK.
3. Verify the blank optical disk is not write-protected (not write-protected = notch
closed).
Troubleshooting: Backing Up Presets
4. Insert the disk into the optical drive.
5. Select the Format Disk option displayed at the top left of the display. The optical drive
LED will light during formatting.
6. Select the Eject Disk option to eject the formatted disk.
7. Press NET/DISK again or select Close at the bottom of the menu to return to the pre-
vious imaging mode.
Backing Up ➤ To copy Tissue Specific Presets to the optical disk:

Presets 1. Boot up the system.
2. Press Setups on the keyboard. The Directory of Setup Options is displayed.
3. Verify the blank optical disk is not write-protected (not write-protected = notch
closed).
4. Insert the disk into the optical drive.
5. Select Tissue Specific Presets (Figure 9-7).
6. Select Copy. The process of formatting and copying the presets to the optical disk
takes several minutes.
NOTE If the disk needs formatting, display prompts will guide you through the format
procedure. After formatting the disk, repeat step 6 and continue with the proce-
dure.
7. To copy the presets from the optical disk to the hard drive, select Install.
Troubleshooting: Backing Up Presets
Close Setups Directory
Figure 9-7 Formatting Optical Disk/Copying Tissue Specific Presets

Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
User The user diagnostics enable the user to access several diagnostic capabilities. These
Diagnostics capabilities enable the user to quickly diagnose system operational status or acquire the
information needed to assist others in system diagnosis.
➤ To access the user diagnostics:

1. Press Setups on the keyboard. The Directory of Setup Options is displayed.
2. Select Diagnostics in the lower left corner of the display. The display appears as in
Figure 9-8.
3. Move the cursor over an item and press SELECT to highlight your choice of tests to
run from the list of Available Tests and Utilities.
4. Select Start to initiate the highlighted test.
NOTES • The Comprehensive Test takes up to 20 minutes to run. The Check Installed
Software utility takes over 10 minutes to run.
• Refer to “Comprehensive Test” on page 205 to run the Comprehensive Test.
Information on the other tests and options is listed in “Check Installed Soft-
ware” on page 206 through “Video Test Patterns Utility” on page 215.
Diagnostics
Available Tests and Utilities:
Select a test or utility from the list.
Comprehensive Test Press "Start" to start it.
Check Installed Software The results will be written below.
Show Bootup Status Report
Show Machine Configuration
Show Installed Options
Backup Diags Data Start/Stop
Video Test Patterns Utility
Results:
Clear
Save...
Search String: Find Next Error
Eject Initialize Modem Close Setups Directory
Figure 9-8 User Diagnostics Menu

Comprehensive The Comprehensive Test is used to determine system operational status. The test com-
Test prises numerous sub-tests run sequentially in the opposite order of data flow, and tests
approximately 90 percent of the card cage circuits. If a sub-test fails, the system com-
pletes the remaining sub-tests. When the Comprehensive Test has been completed, the
results are displayed on the monitor with a message indicating pass or fail.
If a sub-test fails, the comprehensive test fails and a failure code is displayed. There are
over 10,000 possible error codes that log events, timing errors, logic faults, and failure
data. The code is for engineering use only. It has no value to field personnel, but dis-
played errors and error logs can be useful to troubleshoot the problem. Use UpLink to
capture diagnostic data.
Run the Comprehensive Test any time a system error is displayed or when the user sus-
pects problems with the system. If an error message is displayed during the test, note the
error and reboot the system with the ON/STANDBY switch.
The test takes from 15 to 20 minutes to run, depending on which software version is
installed in the system. Also, the Comprehensive Test results are most reliable when run
right after the system boots up.
➤ To invoke the Comprehensive Test:

1. Verify there are no scanheads connected.
CAUTION If the scanheads remain connected, they may become damaged during the test.
2. Under the Directory of Setup Options, select Diagnostics. The display appears as in
Figure 9-8.
3. Highlight Comprehensive Test.
4. Move the cursor to the START button. Press SELECT. A windowed message is dis-
played stating, “This test will take more than fifteen (15) minutes.”
5. Move the cursor to the Continue button. Press SELECT. The results window displays
dots as an indication of the status of the test. If a failure occurs, an error code is dis-
played.
6. To exit the Diagnostics Menu, select Close. The following note is displayed:
NOTE System parameters have changed. It is necessary to reboot the machine before
further scanning can be done.
7. Use the trackball to select the Reboot option. Press SELECT to reboot the system.
Check Installed This test comprises Cyclic Redundancy Checks (also known as CRCs) of all read-only
Software system software files. If a CRC fails, it may indicate a disk drive problem or a corrupted
file. Reinstall the system software and check the DDEA PCB.
Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Check Installed Software.
3. Press SELECT to highlight the option.
4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT. A message is displayed stating “Please
wait, this process will take approximately 2 minutes.”
5. Use the trackball to select OK. Press SELECT. The Start button changes to a Stop
button. When the test is complete, the results are displayed in the results window, and
the Stop button turns into the Start button again. The results are displayed as Com-
pleted: PASS (or FAIL).
6. Select Stop to abort the test if needed.
Show Bootup During system bootup, the CPU queries the individual PCBs and displays the bootup sta-
Status Report tus on the monitor.
Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Show Bootup Status Report.
4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT to initiate the option. The system instanta-
neously displays a note stating the “Bootup status reported NO errors.” Test results
are displayed as Completed: PASS (or FAIL).
Show Machine The Show Machine Configuration option displays the machine ID number, hard disk part
Configuration number, and software version (software build) number. The machine ID number is a
unique number assigned to each system and is programmed into a chip on the SYSCPU
PCB. All machine options to be installed onto a particular system must contain the cor-
rect machine ID number for that particular system or no options will be enabled.
Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Show Machine Configuration.
4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT to initiate the option. The results are dis-
played as:
Machine ID: 0000005fXXXX
Hard-Disk Software: 4252-0XXX-XX 1XX.XX (“X” indicates a numerical place-
holder).
Show Installed The Show Installed Options selection displays the system options installed on a particu-
Options lar system, whether those options were purchased when the system was ordered or for
an upgrade. Refer to the COA (Customer Order Acknowledgement) for the customer
ordered features, and check the installed options list for the options configured for the
system. If there is a discrepancy, order a Machine Options Configuration disk for that par-
ticular system. Re-install the files from the new machine options disk onto the hard drive
and check the configuration again.
Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Show Installed Options.
4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT to initiate the option.
5. Refer to Table 9-4 for a list of the machine options possible with each released soft-
ware version. Machine options will be added as the system matures through the prod-
uct life cycle.
NOTE If there are no machine options listed for a particular software version, that soft-
ware version is not listed in the following table.
Table 9-4 Machine Options/Software Build

Compatibility Matrix
Software Versions
150.23
151.09
Part Number Description Notes
1 8501-8507-01 Extended Doppler Capability ll
2 8501-8507-02 Extended Doppler Capability ll
EMI
3 8501-8523-01 English Language/UIF ll
4 8501-8524-01 German Language/UIF ll
5 8501-8525-01 French Language/UIF ll
6 8501-8523-02 English Language ll
7 8501-8524-02 German Language ll
8 8501-8525-02 French Language ll
9 8501-9622-01 Italian Language ll
10 8501-9058-01 Danish Language ll
11 8501-9060-01 Norwegian Language ll
12 8501-9062-01 Swedish Language ll
13 8501-9064-01 Finnish Language ll
14 8501-8533-01 Voltage/Video 120 NTSC ll
15 8501-8534-01 Voltage/Video 230 NTSC ll
16 8501-8536-01 Voltage/Video 230 PAL ll
Compatibility Matrix (Continued)
Software Versions
150.23
151.09
17 8501-8536-02 Voltage/Video 230 PAL ll
IEC-601-1
18 8501-8665-01 NTSC Video ll
19 8501-8666-01 PAL Video ll
20 8501-8563-01 Capability, L7-4 38 mm ll
21 8501-8565-01 Capability, L10-5 38 mm
22 8501-8567-01 Capability, C4-2 40R ll
23 8501-8574-01 Capability, CIVT5 ll
24 8501-8576-01 Capability, P3-2 20 mm ll
26 8501-8585-01 Clin. Opt., Vasc: TCD ll
27 8501-8586-01 Clin. Opt., Vasc: Cerebro ll
Vasc
28 8501-8587-01 Clin. Opt., Vasc: Peripheral ll
29 8501-8589-01 Clin. Opt., Vasc: Introp ll
30 8501-8595-01 Clin. Opt., Genim: Abdomen ll
31 8501-8596-01 Clin. Opt., Genim: Small ll
Parts
Software Versions
150.23
151.09
32 8501-8597-01 Clin. Opt., Genim: Prostate ll
33 8501-8598-01 Clin. Opt., Genim: Pediatric ll
34 8501-8600-01 Clin. Opt., OB ll
35 8501-8601-01 Clin. Opt., Gyn/Fert ll
36 8501-8604-01 Capability, D5 CW ll
37 8501-8606-01 Capability, D10 CW ll
38 8501-8607-01 Capability, D2 TC ll
39 8501-8612-01 Capability, C3.5 76R ll
40 8501-8621-01 Capability, C7-4 40R ll
41 8501-8622-01 Capability, C9-5 ICT ll
42 8501-8625-01 Capability, CL10-5 26 mm ll
44 8501-8652-01 Color Power Angio ll
45 8501-8653-01 Capability, MPT7-4 ll
46 8501-8654-01 Clin. Opt., Card: Adult ll
47 8501-8655-01 Clin. Opt., Card: Ped/Fetal ll
Echo
Software Versions
150.23
151.09
48 8501-8656-01 Clin. Opt., Card: ll
Transesophag.
49 8501-8657-01 Capability, CW2 ll
50 8501-8668-01 DiskLink ll
51 8501-8683-01 NetLink ll
52 8501-8687-01 Steered CW ll
53 8501-8688-01 Color M-Mode ll
54 8501-8689-01 Frame Grab ll
55 8501-8694-01 Triple Mode ll
56 8501-8695-01 3D Color Power Angio ll
Imaging
57 8501-8696-01 Capability, C8-5 ll
58 8501-8697-01 Capability, CT8-4 ll
59 8501-8698-01 Capability, LI9-5 ll
61 8501-9100-01 Capability, C8-4v ll
62 8501-9102-01 Clin. Opt., Neurosurgical ll
Software Versions
150.23
151.09
63 8501-9103-01 Clin. Opt., Abdominal ll
Surgery
64 8501-9104-01 Clin. Opt., Card: ll
Musculoskeletal
65 8501-9108-01 Clin. Opt., Card: CSI ll
66 8501-9109-01 TSI Patient Optimization ll
67 8501-9127-01 Clin. Opt., Harmonic ll
Research
68 8501-9134-01 Capability, BPT9-5 ll
69 8501-9155-01 WebLink ll
70 8501-9165-01 Clin. Opt., Card: THI ll
71 8501-9166-01 ResearchLink ll 1
72 8501-9167-01 Service Access Diagnostics ll

73 8501-9169-01 Clin. Opt., Adv. Breast ll
Imaging
74 8501-9266-01 Capability, LAP L9-5 ll
75 8501-9169-01 Clin. Opt., Adv. Breast ll
Imaging
Software Versions
150.23
151.09
78 8501-9397-01 Auto Scaling l
79 8501-9398-01 Dicom Scaling l
80 8501-9424-01 Capability, C5-2 40R ll
81 8501-9450-01 Clin. Opt., Rad. CSI ll
82 8501-9451-01 Clin. Opt., Vasc. CSI ll
83 8501-9601-01 3D Grayscale ll
84 8501-9602-01 Clin. Opt., OB THI ll
85 8501-9603-01 Clin. Opt., Abdominal THI ll
86 8501-9617-01 Tissue Harmonic Imaging ll
87 8501-9618-01 Clin. Opt., Gyn/Fert/THI ll
88 8501-9654-01 Enhanced Memory ll
89 8501-9986-01 Capability, C8-5, ATL l
1. For research purposes only. Not a purchasable feature.
Backing-up Refer to the UpLink™ PC-Based Diagnostics manual (P/N 4730-0236-XX) for informa-
Diagnostic Data tion on backing-up diagnostic data.
Video Test The Video Test Pattern Utility is used to isolate monitor, printer, and VCR video prob-
Patterns Utility lems.
Figure 9-8.
2. Move the cursor to Video Test Patterns Utility. The option is highlighted.
3. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT. A note is displayed stating:
“The test patterns will be displayed one at a time. Press the spacebar to view the next
pattern, 1 through 0 to view a specific pattern, or any other key to quit.”
4. Move the cursor to OK. Press SELECT. A grayshade test pattern is displayed.
5. Use the spacebar to move through the individual test patterns, or refer to the test pat-
tern numbers in Table 9-5, and press the appropriate number to obtain the desired
test pattern.
Table 9-5 Video Test Patterns
Test Pattern
Number Description
1 Sixteen grayshade bars displayed vertically. White bars on left, black on
right
2 Eight color bars displayed vertically. White, yellow, light blue, green,
purple, red, dark blue, and black
3 Cross hatch pattern. Black background, with white grid
4 Entire screen displays the letter “y” in every character position. White
letters on a black background
5 Quartered display with circle in the center of the display. Black
background with white pattern
Troubleshooting: Remote Diagnostics
Table 9-5 Video Test Patterns (Continued)
Test Pattern
Number Description
6 Quartered display with circle in the center of the display. White
background with black pattern
7 White rectangle on black background
8 White screen
9 Flat black screen
0 Flat black screen with grid of white dots
Remote The HDI 3500 has a full suite of diagnostic capabilities. Contact your local technical sup-
Diagnostics port center for more information.
Disassembly: Card Cage PCBs and Modules
10 Disassembly
WARNING Always turn power off, disconnect the main power cord from the wall outlet, and wait at
least 30 seconds before removing or installing any PCB, module, or component.
CAUTIONS • Always use correct ESD procedures. ESD damage is cumulative and may not be
noticeable at first. ESD symptoms may be first exhibited as a slight degradation of
performance or image quality.
• Do not pull and reinsert PCBs or other modules while main circuit breaker is ON. To
reset PCBs, use the reset button provided on the card edge of many modules.
Card Cage General procedure

PCBs and 1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect power cord.
Modules 2. Remove covers as necessary to gain access to the part requiring replacement.
3. Loosen captive screws on those boards with shields, or loosen the retaining clips as
necessary.
CAUTION Several modules require that adjacent modules be removed in order to provide ease of
removal or allow correct alignment. For example, remove the PIM, PCM, PSP1, and
PSP2 to correctly align the IIM module by hand to prevent misalignment of the PCB to
the centerplane.
Disassembly: Monitor
➤ To remove the IIM:
1. Remove the right side panel in addition to the rear panel.
2. Remove all cable connectors from both the IIM and PIM.
3. Remove modules immediately to the right to gain clearance (to slot A3B).
4. Remove the IIM.
➤ To insert the IIM:

1. Remove both modules immediately to the right (to slot A3B).
2. Use your right hand to align the IIM with the card guides and to ensure the connectors
mate correctly with the centerplane.
CAUTION Use caution when inserting the IIM into the centerplane. If connector pins are bent during
insertion of the IIM, damage to the IIM or centerplane may result.
3. Replace the PIM and PCM.

4. Tighten all fasteners to ensure proper EMI/RFI shielding.
Monitor NOTE Always place the monitor on its back to prevent damage to the locking tabs when
the monitor is not installed on the system. (Four plastic feet are on the back of
the monitor.)
➤ To install the monitor:
1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect power cord.
2. Place the monitor on the system with the tabs inserted into the latching assemblies.
3. Slide the retaining levers forward to engage the locking tabs.
Disassembly: Control Panel PCBs and On/Standby Switch
4. Rotate the retaining levers out and up to secure the monitor. Use a tool inserted into
the center hole of the lever if necessary.
5. Connect the video/audio (monitor signal) cable and engage the slide lock.
6. Connect the power cord to the monitor and rotate the cable lock to secure the con-
nector to the monitor.
➤ To remove the monitor:

1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect power cord.
2. Remove the VCR.
3. Release the cable lock on the power cord connector on the lower rear of the monitor
by rotating it to the rear of the system.
4. Disconnect the power cord from the monitor.
5. Slide the locking plate on the video/audio (monitor signal) cable to the left.
6. Disconnect the video/audio cable connector from the monitor.
7. Rotate down and slide to the rear the retaining levers under each side of the monitor
to release the monitor tabs. Use a tool inserted into the center hole of the lever if nec-
essary.
8. Lift the monitor up and off of the system.
Control Panel ➤ To remove the Control Panel PCBs and On/Standby switch:
PCBs and On/ 1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect the power cord.
Standby 2. Use a small, common screwdriver to push in the locking bar latch release on the left
rear of the upper user interface assembly (step 1 in Figure 10-1).
Switch
3. Slide the lock bar to the right and remove it (step 2).
Disassembly: Control Panel PCBs and On/Standby Switch
4. Lift the top edge of the upper user interface assembly and remove the assembly to
gain access to the UIM or the lower user interface assembly (step 3).
5. Remove the Control Panel PCBs or the On/Standby switch as necessary.
1 Push in with common screwdriver
2 Slide, then remove
3 Lift and remove
Figure 10-1 Control Panel Details

Disassembly: Trackball
Trackball ➤ To replace the trackball:

1. Remove the upper and lower user interface assemblies by performing step 1 through
step 4 of “Control Panel PCBs and On/Standby Switch” on page 219.
2. Remove the old trackball and bracket.
3. If using a new style trackball (trackball P/N 2100-1480-03 or trackball kit
P/N 2100-1505-XX), carve away the inside corner of the PCB closest to the trackball
cable connector using a utility knife. (Squaring-off the corner provides clearance for
the new trackball.) If using an older style trackball, continue with step 6.
4. Verify the trackball moves freely and has a snug protective seal.
a. Adjust the tension on the trackball by turning the trackball seal ring counterclock-
wise to loosen or clockwise to tighten. Wear a surgical glove to enhance your grip
on the plastic ring.
b. If the trackball movement is difficult, remove spacer rings by disassembling the
trackball and removing rings as required.
5. Reassemble the user interface assembly.
6. Install the upper and lower user interface assemblies and the control panel lock bar.
7. Power up the system.
8. Check the trackball for proper operation.
Internal OEMs ➤ To install an Internal OEM (Figure 10-3):

1. Lay two straps on a flat surface; place OEM device upside down on the straps.
2. Place OEM tray upside down on the OEM.
- Center the OEM between the sides of the tray with the captive screw to the rear of
the OEM (see detail in Figure 10-2).
- The front of the tray should slightly overhang the OEM.
Disassembly: Internal OEMs
- REAR -
Screws
OEM tray
MIC
5600
890
Tabs
- FRONT -
Figure 10-2 OEM Orientation on OEM Tray

3. Pass the straps through the first slots outside of the OEM with the ring, velcro and
buckle, as shown in Figure 10-3.
4. Adjust the buckle as tight as possible. Then loosen the velcro, pull on both ends of the
strap until snug, and reattach the velcro. Repeat for the second strap.
5. Secure tray in OEM bay with tabs in slots.
Disassembly: Internal OEMs
Velcro tail
Buckle
Ring
Universal
OEM plate
Strap
OEM
See Figure 14-8
Figure 10-3 Internal OEM Installation

Disassembly: Self-Adhesive Rubber Handle Bumpers
Self-Adhesive 1. Remove old bumper material and clean the old adhesive with isopropyl alcohol.
Rubber 2. Orient fastener clips so that the clip and bumper curvature line up, and insert clips
Handle into holes on each end of the bumper.
Bumpers 3. Remove the adhesive backing from the bumper.

4. Line up the three tabs on the bumper with the three holes on the handle.
5. Wrap the bumper around the handle and insert a fastener clip into each end. Ensure
that the bumper is not stretched so far that the fastener holes are missed.
6. Press on each fastener clip to ensure that they are well seated.
7. Press on the bumper to secure it to the handle. Ensure that the bumper is securely
fastened.
Scanhead ➤ To remove the Scanhead Select Module:

Select Module 1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect power cord.
Removal and 2. Disconnect scanheads from the system.
Installation 3. Remove the system front cover.
4. Starting with screw number 14, loosen the screws in the reverse sequence shown in
Figure 10-4.
5. Remove the Scanhead Select Module.
6. Visually inspect the module.
➤ To install the Scanhead Select Module:

1. Align the Scanhead Select Module over the Channel boards and flush against the
system. Ensure the module connects with the Channel board connectors and is level
and square on the front of the system.
2. Hand tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 10-4.
Disassembly: Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation
3. Replace missing or damaged screws with part number 1563-0258-01.
CAUTION Overtightening the screws may damage the Scanhead Select Module gasket and/or
metal shield, requiring replacement of the module.
4. Use a 7/64 Allen wrench to tighten the screws in the order shown. The base of the
screw heads should be flush with the Scanhead Select Module.
5. Connect the system power cord and turn on the system.
6. Reconnect scanheads and verify system operation.
7. Install the system front cover.
CAUTION Carefully align the S/HSEL Module over the

Channel Boards. Do not damage the RF
gasket.
12 5 14
9 7
13 11
1 2
1. Hand tighten screws
3 4 (P/N1563-0258-01) in the order shown.
2. Use a wrench to tighten the screws an
additional 1/4 turn in the order shown.
8 6 10
Figure 10-4 S/HSEL Installation Details

Screw (4 plcs)
Metal jaws
See Figure 14-37
Figure 10-5 Monitor Cable Clamp Installation (Control Module)

RFI gasket
Backing plate
Cable stripped
Bracket
Nuts (or screws)
See Figure 14-3
Figure 10-6 Monitor RFI Cable Clamp Installation (Right Side Panel)
Disassembly: Transceiver Retaining Clip
Transceiver The network transceiver (P/N 2100-1418-01) may be physically loose or have an inter-
Retaining Clip mittent connection to the system. This may cause intermittent network connections or
“0084” error messages. Order kit part number 2950-0615-01 and replace the transceiver
retaining clip using the following procedure:
1. Locate the clip on the E-net connector on the CPU PCB.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) both screws on the “D” connector.
3. Slide the old clip off the screws.
4. Position the new clip with the most open side toward the PCB and with the small
screw hole to the top.
5. Slide the clip over the screws.
6. Tighten the screws and verify the slide works.
7. Verify that the transceiver can be securely attached to the CPU.
8. If other parts need to be replaced, remove the PCB from the card cage to replace
them.
Transceiver If the transceiver is not properly supported network communications may be interrupted.
Support On systems with a metal rear cover that has network communication problems, order
P/N 1065-5704-01 to replace the rear cover. On systems with a plastic rear cover, install
Bracket
a transceiver support bracket using the following procedure.
➤ To install a transceiver support bracket:

1. Order transceiver support bracket kit P/N 8000-2235-01.
2. Disconnect cabling and remove the rear panel.
3. If the panel has holes for the support bracket, proceed with step 9 to install the
bracket. If the panel does not have holes continue with the following step.
Disassembly: Transceiver Support Bracket
4. Mark the holes on the cover using a template.
a. Metal template: Order P/N 1200-0355-01.
b. Paper template: Verify the dimensions are as indicated before cutting the template
out and using it Figure 10-7.
5. Place the template on the rear panel as shown in Figure 10-8.
6. Drill 1/8-inch pilot holes in each hole location, remove the template, and re-drill with 1/
4-inch drill bit.
7. Remove the material vertically between the holes.
8. Change the rear panel part number.
a. On systems with four swivel casters, change the number to 1065-2892-04 (from
1065-2892-03).
b. On systems with 2 swivel casters, change the number to 1065-5704-01 (from
1065-2892-02).
9. Insert the stud bracket (P/N 1065-5623-01) into the cover Figure 10-9.
10. Install the support bracket (P/N 1065-5622-01) over the studs.
11. Loosely install the KEPS nuts (P/N 1543-0002) on the studs.
12. Install the rear panel.
13. Clean the bracket and the transceiver with isopropyl alcohol.
14. Remove the adhesive strips from the Velcro. Attach the Velcro (P/N 2210-0125 and
2210-0126) to the bracket and the transceiver. (Keep the Velcro halves separated.)
15. Connect the transceiver to the PCB connector and secure it with the retaining clip.
16. Snug the bracket to the PCB and secure the Velcro halves to each other.
17. Tighten the KEPS nuts.
18. Verify system operation.
9/32 In
5/16 In 1 21/32 In 9/32 In
3/4 In
1/4 In
2 9/32 In
3 5/8 In
Figure 10-7 Transceiver Support Bracket Template

Template
Inside of rear panel Hole locations
Figure 10-8 Template Positioning

Stud bracket
Support bracket
KEPS nuts
Transceiver
Outside of rear cover
Figure 10-9 Installing Transceiver Support Bracket

Cabling: Introduction
11 Cabling
Introduction This section contains system card edge, cabling, and connector information. To aid in
navigating, figures have references to tables and table items to appropriate figures. Illus-
trations of the signal cables are grouped by system component or peripheral device. Use
the following rules to navigate through cabling:
• When using electronic copies of this manual:
- Locate cables using the system cabling diagrams in Figure 11-39 through
Figure 11-42. Part numbers on these diagrams are electronically linked to their
descriptions in Table 11-34 and Table 11-35.
- Locate cables using the alphabetized descriptions in Table 11-34 and
Table 11-35. Together these tables list all the cables and have references to
Section 14, “Parts”, and to cable illustrations.
- Find the physical location of cables in system illustrations of Section 14, “Parts”,
by using cross-references in the cable illustrations, or in Table 11-34 and
Table 11-35.
NOTE Select the cross-reference in the first header of each table. Electronic cross-ref-
erences in table headers that are continued (same header - next page), will not
respond when selected.
• When using printed copies of this manual:

- Locate cables using the alphabetized descriptions in Table 11-34 and
Table 11-35. Use figure references on the table to find illustrations and pinout
tables.
Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
- Locate cable part numbers using the system diagrams in Figure 11-39 through
Figure 11-42.
System Figure 11-1 through Figure 11-4 are illustrations of the system primary connector assem-
Cabling and blies.
Connectors Figure 11-5 shows the numbering pattern of the centerplane and PCB connectors. Also
shown is the general layout of PCBs, the general locations of test points, LEDs, and reset
and interrupt switches.
Figure 11-6 through Figure 11-38 are illustrations of system and OEM (internal and
external) signal and power cables. Pinout information for these cables are provided in
Table 11-1 through Table 11-33.
Scanhead
connectors
Optical disk drive
ECG Static probe

connector
Pulse (Aux. Ch A)
High-level ECG
(from ECG monitors) Phono (Aux. Ch B)
Footswitch
See Figure 14-15 DDEA

for Card Cage DDEA/A1F
Figure 11-1 Connector Locations, Front Panel

CONTROL Int. cable to user interface !

Ext. monitor non-interlaced RGB
PANEL NI-RGB (IRGB in VCR playback)
Int. monitor I-RGB out/in Ext. hardcopy interlaced RGB

MONITOR non-interlaced RGB
(IRGB in VCR playback) S-VID Ext. S-VHS VCR video
VCR Int. VCR S-VHS video CVID Ext. composite video out/in
B&W VID Ext. monochrome video out

Int. hardcopy interlaced
HARDCOPY RGB OSP. and mono-
chrome video out Not used on HDI 3500
SCIP
E-NET
Peripheral Interface Module
Int. Interface Module PIM/A2B
See Figure 14-22 IIM/A1B
for Card Cage
Figure 11-2 Connector Locations, Rear Panel (1 of 2)

!
L
Ext. serial printer
R Ext. VCR
10101 Serial 9-pin serial connector audio out
for laptop (P4)
L
E-Net Ethernet Ext. VCR

R
audio in
System CPU Adapter PCB

See Figure 14-22 CPU/A6B ADAPTR/A9B
for Card Cage
Figure 11-3 Connector Locations, Rear Panel (2 of 2)

P506 Secondary of Secondary

24 VDC to System Fans P508 Transformer
P505
Power Out to Monitor P507 Primary of Secondary
Transformer
P504
Power Out to OEM
P503
Power Out to OEM
P502 See Figure 14-22

Main Transformer Primary
P501
Main Transformer Secondary
Figure 11-4 AC Input Module (ACIM) Connector Locations

Centerplane
A
B Test points
C
D
E A B
C
D Reset SW
E
NMI SW
Stiffener
1 DSP LED
SCIP LED
MOP LED
95
Phone jack
Pin-plug on
centerplane
Receptacle
Bar code and part number PCB component side

label area on solder side
(To left when facing card cage)
See Figure 13-1
Figure 11-5 Centerplane Connector and Card Edge Features

Signal Cables System and OEM (internal and external) signal cables are illustrated in Figure 11-6
through Figure 11-33. Pinout information for these cables are provided in Table 11-1
through Table 11-27.
2275-0267-XX Molded strain relief
RCA male 1 RCA male 3

black black
Connect one end of cable to ADAPTR
PCB Ext. VCR Audio (In and Out) and
the other end of the cable to Ext. SVHS
RCA male 2 VCR Audio (Out and In) RCA male 4
red red
Both ends of cable are cabled the same. Use
either end for either device.
See Table 11-1
Figure 11-6 RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX)

Table 11-1 RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX)
From ADAPTR PCB To External VCR
Audio In/Out Audio Out/In Function
MALE 1 TIP MALE 3 TIP R-AUDIO
MALE 1 RING MALE 3 RING R-AUDIO GND
MALE 2 TIP MALE 4 TIP L-AUDIO
MALE 2 RING MALE 4 RING L-AUDIO GND
2275-0326-XX
From PIM PCB NI- RGB To OEM Video In
Pin 1 Red
P2
P1
Grn
P3
Blu
P4
Pin 9 Sync
P5
See Table 11-2
Figure 11-7 OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX)

Table 11-2 OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX)

To OEM Video In
From PIM PCB Connectors Function
P1-1 P2 CENTER RED SIGNAL
P1-6 P2 SHIELD RED_RETURN
P1-2 P3 CENTER GREEN SIGNAL
P1-7 P3 SHIELD GREEN_RETURN
P1-3 P4 CENTER BLUE SIGNAL
P1-8 P4 SHIELD BLUE_RETURN
P1-4 P5 CENTER SYNC SIGNAL
P1-9 P5 SHIELD SYNC_RETURN
2275-0335-XX
Printer Category 5 cable Ethernet Wall

Connector
P1 J1
Pin 1 Pin 8 See Table 11-3
Figure 11-8 Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX)
Table 11-3 Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX)

From Printer To Ethernet Connector Signal Function
P1-1 J1-1 To be added.
P1-2 J1-2
P1-3 J1-3
P1-4 J1-4
Table 11-3 Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX)
From Printer To Ethernet Connector Signal Function
P1-5 J1-5
P1-6 J1-6
P1-7 J1-7
P1-8 J1-8
2275-0337-XX
1 NC 9
P1
P4 2 3
3 2 To laptop computer
From CPU PCB 4 6
5 5
6 4
7 8
8 7
9 NC 1
P4 is the second connector from the top of the CPU PCB (9-pin Dsub, male).
Either end of the cable may be used on the HDI 5000 or the laptop connectors.
The only wires needed for communication between the HDI 5000 and a laptop computer are the TX, RX,
and GND wires.
See Table 11-4
Figure 11-9 Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX)

Table 11-4 Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX)

From CPU To Laptop Signal Function (P4 on CPU)
P4-1 to P4-6 - CD
P4-2 P1-3 RX
P4-3 P1-2 TX
P4-4 P1-6 to P1-1 DTR
P4-5 P1-5 GND
P4-6 P1-4 DSRn
P4-7 P1-8 RTS
P4-8 P1-7 CTS
P4-9 NO CONNECTION
- P1-9 NO CONNECTION
2275-0327-XX
From IIM PCB HARDCOPY To AAM Video In
Pin 1 Pin 1
P1 P2
Pin 37 See Table 11-5 Pin 9
Figure 11-10 AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input

(P/N 2275-0327-XX)
Table 11-5 AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input

(P/N 2275-0327-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY) To AAM (Video In) Function
P1-1 P2-5 RED SIGNAL
P1-20 P2-4 RED_RETURN
P1-2 P2-3 GREEN SIGNAL
P1-21 P2-4 GREEN_RETURN
P1-3 P2-1 BLUE SIGNAL
P1-22 P2-2 BLUE_RETURN
P1-4 P2-6 SYNC SIGNAL
P1-23 P2-2 SYNC_RETURN
2275-0395-XX
From IIM PCB HARDCOPY To AAM Video In
Pin 1 Pin 1
P1 P2
Pin 37 Pin 9
See Table 11-6
Figure 11-11 AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX)

Table 11-6 AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY) To AAM (Video In) Function
P1-9 P2-3 Y-SIGNAL
P1-10 P2-8 Y-RETURN
P1-15 P2-4 C-SIGNAL
P1-5 P2-9 C-RETURN
2275-0394-XX
From PIM PCB IRGB To AAM Video In
Pin 1 Pin 1
P1 P2
Pin 15 Pin 9
See Table 11-7
Figure 11-12 AAM Video Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX)
Table 11-7 AAM Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX)

From PIM (IRGB) To AAM (Video In) Function
P1-1 P2-5 RED SIGNAL
P1-9 P2-4 RED RETURN
P1-2 P2-3 GREEN SIGNAL
P1-10 P2-4 GREEN RETURN
P1-3 P2-1 BLUE SIGNAL
P1-11 P2-2 BLUE RETURN
P1-4 P2-6 SYNC SIGNAL
P1-12 P2-2 SYNC RETURN
2275-0396-XX
From PIM PCB IRGB To AAM Video In
Pin 1 Pin 1
P1 P2
Pin 15 See Table 11-8 Pin 9
Figure 11-13 AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX)

Table 11-8 AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX)
From PIM (IRGB) To AAM (Video In) Function
P1-9 P2-3 Y-SIGNAL
P1-10 P2-8 Y-RETURN
P1-15 P2-4 C-SIGNAL
P1-5 P2-9 C-RETURN
3500-1404-XX See Table 11-9 Pin 25 To VCR
P2
From IIM PCB VCR
Pin 25
P1
Pin 1
P6
P8
P7
P4
Pin 1 Shielded signal

Coaxial conductors (4X) conductors (5X) P3
Figure 11-14 VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX)

Table 11-9 VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX)

From IIM (VCR) To VCR Function
P1-1 P3-3 VCR_IN_Y
P1-14 P3-1 (Shield) VCR_IN_Y return
P1-2 P3-4 VCR_IN_C
P1-15 P3-2 (Shield) VCR_IN_C return
P1-9 P2-2 TX
P1-10 P2-3 RX
P1-12 P2-7 Return
P1-11 P2-Shell Shield
P1-3 P4-3 VCR_OUT_Y
P1-16 P4-1 (Shield) VCR_OUT_Y return
P1-4 P4-4 VCR_OUT_C
P1-17 P4-2 (Shield) VCR_OUT_C return
P1-5 P7-Center IN_L
P1-18 P7-Shield IN_L_RET
P1-6 P8-Center IN_R
P1-19 P8-Shield IN_R_RET
P1-7 P6-Center OUT_L
P1-20 P6-Shield OUT_L_RET
P1-8 P5-Center OUT_R
P1-21 P5-Shield OUT_R_RET
3500-2642-XX
From PIM PCB S-VID

Pin 9
P1
To VCR S-VIDEO input
J1
J2
To VCR S-VIDEO output
Pin 1
See Table 11-10
Figure 11-15 VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX)

Table 11-10 VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX)

From PIM SVID To J1/J2 Function
P1-1 J1-3 PIM_LUMA_EXTVCR
P1-5 J1-1 PIM_LUMA_EXTVCR_RETURN
P1-2 J1-4 PIM_CHROMA_EXTVCR
P1-6 J1-2 PIM_CHROMA_EXTVCR_RETURN
P1-3 J2-3 EXTVCR_LUMA_PIM
P1-7 J2-1 EXTVCR_LUMA_PIM_RETURN
P1-4 J2-4 EXTVCR_CHROMA_PIM
P1-8 J2-2 EXTVCR_CHROMA_PIM_RETURN
S1
3500-1483-XX
DDEA PCB
S3
To hard disk drive
S2
To optical
disk drive
See Table 11-11

All wires have corresponding pins on both plugs.
Figure 11-16 Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX)

Table 11-11 Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX)

From DDEA To Optical Drive To Hard Drive
S1-1 S2-1 S3-1
S1-2 S2-2 S3-2
S1-3 S2-3 S3-3
S1-X S2-X S3-X
S1-49 S2-49 S3-49
S1-50 S2-50 S3-50
3500-1539-XX
Coax
P2
P1
Shielded Cable
To MIC
(All Versions)
From IIM Hardcopy

See Table 11-12
Figure 11-17 Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX)
Table 11-12 Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX)
From IIM To Aspect MIC Function
P1-6 P2-13 VIDEO (coax)
P1-25 P2-23 VIDEO RETURN (coax shield)
P1-8 P2-25 PRINT (shielded cable)
P1-12 P2-12 READY (shielded cable)
P1-28 P2-10 RETURN (shielded cable)
P1-29 P2-22 SHIELD (shielded cable)
3500-1540-XX
From IIM PCB HARDCOPY

P1
Pin 1
To B/W video
printer
J1
J2
Pin 37
See Table 11-13
Figure 11-18 B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX)

Table 11-13 B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX)

From IIM (HARDCOPY) To B/W Video Printer Function
P1-6 J1 Center VIDEO
P1-25 J1 Shield VIDEO_RETURN
P1-8 J2 Tip PRINT
P1-13 J2 Ring READY
P1-27 J2 Housing RETURN
P1-28 J2 Shell (Drain wire)
3500-1541-XX
To RGB
From IIM PCB HARDCOPY printer
Pin 1 J1 Red
P1
J2 Grn
J3 Blu
J4 Sync
J5 On-screen
programming
J6
Printer control
Pin 37
See Table 11-14
Figure 11-19 Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N 3500-1541-XX)
Table 11-14 Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB

(P/N 3500-1541-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY) To RGB Printer Function
P1-1 J1 Center RED (R)
P1-20 J1 Shield RED_RETURN
P1-2 J2 Center GRN (G)
P1-21 J2 Shield GRN_RETURN
P1-3 J3 Center BLU (B)
P1-22 J3 Shield BLUE_RETURN
P1-4 J4 Center SNC (Sync)
P1-23 J4 Shield SNC_RETURN
P1-5 J5 Center OSP (VIDEO OUT)
P1-24 J5 Shield OSP_RETURN (VIDEO OUT RETURN)
P1-8 J6 Tip -
P1-12 J6 Ring -
P1-27 J6 Housing -
P1-28 Shield (Drain) (Shield connected to housing at J6)
3500-2644-XX
To RGB printer
From PIM PCB I-RGB J1 Red

Pin 15 J2 Grn
P1 Video in
J3 Blu
J4 Sync
J5 Red
J6 Grn
Video out
J7 Blu
Pin 1 J8 Sync
See Table 11-15
Figure 11-20 Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB

(P/N 3500-2644-XX)
Table 11-15 Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB

(P/N 3500-2644-XX)
From PIM IRGB To Coax Connectors Function
P1-1 J1 Center PIM_RED_EXTHRDCPY
P1-9 J1 Shield RED_OUT_RETURN
P1-2 J2 Center PIM_GRN_EXTHRDCPY
P1-10 J2 Shield GRN_OUT_RETURN
P1-3 J3 Center PIM_BLUE_EXTHRDCPY
P1-11 J3 Shield BLUE_OUT_RETURN
P1-4 J4 Center PIM_CSYNC_EXTHRDCPY
P1-12 J4 Shield CSYNC_OUT_RETURN
P1-8 J5 Center EXTHRDCPY_RED_PIM
P1-13 J5 Shield RED_IN_RETURN
P1-7 J6 Center EXTHRDCPY_GRN_PIM
P1-14 J6 Shield GRN_IN_RETURN
P1-6 J7 Center EXTHRDCPY_BLUE_PIM
P1-5 J8 Center EXTHRDCPY_CSYNC_PIM
P1-15 J8 Shield CSYNC_IN_RETURN
3500-2641-XX
To Sony RGB printer
From IIM PCB HARDCOPY J1 Red

Pin 37 J2 Grn
Video in
J3 Blu
J4 Sync
P1 J5 Red
J6 Grn
Video out
J7 Blu
Pin 1 J8 Sync
J9 Printer control
See Table 11-16
Figure 11-21 Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX)

Table 11-16 Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly
(P/N 3500-2641-XX)
From IIM HARDCOPY To Coax Connectors Function
P1-1 J1 Center PIM_RED_INTHRDCPY
P1-2 J2 Center PIM_GRN_INTHRDCPY
Table 11-16 Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly
(P/N 3500-2641-XX) (Continued)
P1-3 J3 Center PIM_BLUE_INTHRDCPY
P1-4 J4 Center PIM_CSYNC_INTHRDCPY
P1-14 J5 Center INTHRDCPY_RED_PIM
P1-15 J6 Center INTHRDCPY_GRN_PIM
P1-16 J7 Center INTHRDCPY_BLUE_PIM
P1-17 J8 Center INTHRDCPY_CSYNC_PIM
P1-8 J9 Tip PIM_CNTRL_0_INTHRDCPY
P1-12 J9 Ring INTHRDCPY_STATUS_0_PIM
P1-29 J9 Housing GROUND
P1-30 J9 Housing SHIELD
3500-2643-XX
To Mitsubishi RGB printer
From IIM PCB HARDCOPY J1 Red

Pin 1 J2 Grn
P1 Video in
J3 Blu
J4 Sync
J5 Red
J6 Grn
Video out
J7 Blu
Pin 37 J8 Sync
J9 Hardcopy control
(J9 is an 8-pin mini-DIN connector)
See Table 11-17
Figure 11-22 Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX)

Table 11-17 Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX)

P1-1 J1 Center PIM_RED_INTHRDCPY
P1-2 J2 Center PIM_GRN_INTHRDCPY
P1-3 J3 Center PIM_BLUE_INTHRDCPY
P1-4 J4 Center PIM_CSYNC_INTHRDCPY
P1-14 J5 Center INTHRDCPY_RED_PIM
P1-15 J6 Center INTHRDCPY_GRN_PIM
P1-16 J7 Center INTHRDCPY_BLUE_PIM
P1-17 J8 Center INTHRDCPY_CSYNC_PIM
P1-8 J9-5 PIM_CNTRL0_HRDCPY
P1-9 J9-2 PIM_CNTRL1_HRDCPY
P1-12 J9-4 HRDCPY_STATUS0_PIM
P1-29 J9 Shield SHIELD
3500-1835-XX
P2
P1
See Table 11-18
Figure 11-23 DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX)

Table 11-18 DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX)
From P1 To P2 Function
P1-1 P2-4 Tip Shunt
P1-2 P2-5 Tip Spring
P1-3 P2-1 Sleeve
3500-2614-XX
P2
Left speaker + Blk
P3
Left speaker - Wht
P4
+12 V Blk
P5 P1
Lamp drive Wht
P6
Right speaker + Blk
P7
Right speaker - Wht
See Table 11-19
Figure 11-24 Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX)

Table 11-19 Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX)

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 Function
1 - - 1 - - - +12 V (black)
2 1 - - - - - Left Speaker+ (black)
3 - 1 - - - - Left Speaker- (white)
4 - - - - - - Ground (not used)
5 - - - - 1 - Right Speaker+ (black)
6 - - - - - 1 Right Speaker- (white)
7 - - - 1 - - Lamp Drive (white)
3500-2632-XX
RED
P1
WHITE
PCB
See Table 11-20
Figure 11-25 Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX)

Table 11-20 Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX)
From P1(Plug) To PCB Function
Ring Red Audio
Tip White Audio Return
Shield No connection Ground
3500-2633-XX
From IIM PCB MONITOR
Pin 1 To monitor
P2
P1
Pin 25
Pin 37
Pin 1
Sliding latch
See Table 11-21
Figure 11-26 Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX)

Table 11-21 Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX)

From IIM (MONITOR) To Monitor Function
P2-1 P1-10 GND
P2-20 P1-9 L_SPKR
P2-2 P1-22 GND
P2-21 P1-21 R_SPKR
P2-14 - AUDIO SHIELD
P2-11 P1-11 MICR+
P2-30 P1-13 MICR-
P2-12 P1-12 MICR_SHIELD
P2-33 P1-17 CSYNC_INTMON
P2-15 P1-4 GND
P2-17 P1-16 BLUE_INTMON
P2-35 P1-3 BLUE_INTMON_REF
P2-18 P1-15 GREEN_INTMON
P2-36 P1-2 GREEN_INTMON_REF
P2-19 P1-14 RED_INTMON
P2-37 P1-1 RED_INTMON_REF
2275-0393-XX
LED
Panel lens Panel connector
Panel
Header connector
2-wire cable assembly
(No pin-out table)
Cable assembly is located in the monitor. The LED is positioned above the
monitor controls and may be seen through holes in the monitor cover.
Figure 11-27 LED Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0393-XX)

3500-2639-XX
To ON/STANDBY switch To UIM PCB ON/STANDBY
Rear connector (Black)

P1
1
2
3
Center connector (Red)

Unconnected
See Table 11-22
Figure 11-28 On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX)

Table 11-22 On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX)
To ON/STANDBY Switch
From UIM PCB Spade Lugs Function
P1-1 Spade Lug (Black wire) GROUND
P1-2 Spade Lug (Red wire) IIM_P2-8
P1-3 Drain - No Connection (Gnd) GROUND
3500-2741-XX
From P3 UIM PCB To Command Module
Pin 9 Pin 9
P3 P2
Pin 1 Pin 1
See Table 11-23
Figure 11-29 Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX)

Table 11-23 Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX)

From P3 UIM To P2 Command Module Function
P3-9 P2-9 +5 VOLT
P3-8 P2-8 +5 VOLT
P3-7 P2-7 GROUND
P3-6 P2-6 GROUND
P3-5 P2-5 GROUND (Not used)
P3-4 P2-4 RMOTE_DATA_UIF
P3-3 P2-3 PIM_CLOCK_UIF
P3-2 P2-2 PIM_STROBE_UIF
P3-1 P2-1 UIF_DATA_RMOTE
3500-2752-XX
Shield
Blk
P1 PCB
Red
See Table 11-24
Figure 11-30 Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly

(P/N 3500-2752-XX)
Table 11-24 Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly
(P/N 3500-2752-XX)
From P1 To PCB Function
P1-3 RED MIC+
P1-2 BLACK MIC-
P1-1 SHIELD SHIELD
3500-2770-XX
To UIM PCB To lower user interface
Pin 1 P1 J1
Pin 68
Front View
(Both connector
ends) See Table 11-25
Figure 11-31 UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly

(P/N 3500-2770-XX)
Table 11-25 UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly
(P/N 3500-2770-XX)
From P1 UIM PCB To J1 Lower UIF Function
P1-1 J1-1 L_SENSE_12
P1-10 J1-10 TB_YA
P1-11 J1-11 TB_XB
P1-12 J1-12 TB_XA
P1-13 J1-13 L_LED_1
P1-14 J1-14 L_SENSE_15
P1-15 J1-15 L_SCAN_5
P1-16 J1-16 L_SCAN_3
P1-17 J1-17 L_SCAN_0
P1-18 J1-18 L_SCAN_2
P1-19 J1-19 L_SCAN_6
P1-20 J1-20 L_SENSE_14
P1-21 J1-21 L_LED_2
P1-22 J1-22 DA_4
P1-23 J1-23 DA_5
P1-24 J1-24 DCS1n
P1-25 J1-25 DCS2n
P1-26 J1-26 DCS4n
P1-27 J1-27 AND_CLK
P1-28 J1-28 DD_1
P1-29 J1-29 DD_2
P1-30 J1-30 DD_4
P1-31 J1-31 DD_5
P1-32 J1-32 DA_0
P1-33 J1-33 DD_7
P1-34 J1-34 DA_1
P1-35 J1-35 L_SENSE_10
P1-36 J1-36 GROUND
P1-37 J1-37 L_SENSE_08
P1-38 J1-38 GROUND
P1-39 J1-39 L_SENSE_05
P1-40 J1-40 GROUND
P1-41 J1-41 L_SENSE_02
P1-42 J1-42 GROUND
P1-43 J1-43 TB_YB
P1-44 J1-44 -12 VOLT
P1-45 J1-45 L_LED_3
P1-46 J1-46 -12 VOLT
P1-47 J1-47 L_SENSE_13
P1-48 J1-48 L_SCAN_7
P1-49 J1-49 L_SCAN_1
P1-50 J1-50 +5 VOLT
P1-51 J1-51 L_SCAN_4
P1-52 J1-52 +5 VOLT
P1-53 J1-53 L_LED_8
P1-54 J1-54 +5 VOLT
P1-55 J1-55 DA_3
P1-56 J1-56 +5 VOLT
P1-57 J1-57 DCS0n
P1-58 J1-58 +5 VOLT
P1-59 J1-59 DCS3n
P1-60 J1-60 +5 VOLT
P1-61 J1-61 DD_0
P1-62 J1-62 GROUND
P1-63 J1-63 DD_3
P1-64 J1-64 GROUND
P1-65 J1-65 DD_6
P1-66 J1-66 GROUND
P1-67 J1-67 DA_2
P1-68 J1-68 GROUND
3500-2771-XX
Pin 25
To IIM PCB CONTROL PANEL To P2 UIM PCB
P1 J1
Pin 1
See Table 11-26
Figure 11-32 IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX)

Table 11-26 IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX)

To IIM PCB CONTROL PANEL To P2 UIM PCB Function
P1-1 J1-1 +5 VOLT
P1-2 J1-2 +5 VOLT
P1-3 J1-3 +5 VOLT
P1-4 J1-4 +5 VOLT
P1-5 J1-5 +12 VOLT
P1-6 J1-6 -12 VOLT
P1-7 J1-7 No Connection
P1-8 J1-8 ON/STANDBY SWITCH-2
P1-11 J1-11 GROUND
P1-12 J1-12 PIM_CLOCK_UIF
P1-13 J1-13 PIM_DATA_UIF
P1-14 J1-14 GROUND
P1-15 J1-15 GROUND
P1-16 J1-16 GROUND
P1-17 J1-17 GROUND
P1-18 J1-18 GROUND
P1-19 J1-19 GROUND
P1-20 J1-20 SPEAKER LS1
Table 11-26 IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX) (Continued)
To IIM PCB CONTROL PANEL To P2 UIM PCB Function
P1-21 J1-21 GROUND
P1-24 J1-24 PIM_STROBE_UIF
P1-25 J1-25 UIF_DATA_PIM
3500-2772-XX
From cable 3500-2633-XX

To ISEM Video In
(IIM MONITOR)
P1-1 P1-2
Pin 37 Pin 25
Pin 1 Pin 1
To cable 3500-2633-XX From ISEM Video Out

(Monitor)
P2-2
P2-1
Pin 37 Pin 37
Pin 1 Pin 1
See Table 11-27, Table 11-28, and Table 11-29
Figure 11-33 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2772-XX)

Table 11-27 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P1-1 to P1-2

(P/N 3500-2772-XX)
From P1-1 IIM MONITOR To P1-2 ISEM Video In Function
14 14 RED_VIDEO
1 1 RED_RETURN
15 15 GREEN_VIDEO
2 2 GREEN_RETURN
16 16 BLUE_VIDEO
3 3 BLUE_RETURN
17 17 COMPOSITE_SYNC
4 4 SYNC_RETURN
21 21 RIGHT_SPEAKER+
22 22 RIGHT_SPEAKER-
9 9 LEFT_SPEAKER+
10 10 LEFT_SPEAKER-
4 4 GROUND
11 11 UPHONE+
13 13 UPHONE-
12 12 UPHONE_SHIELD
Table 11-28 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P2-1 to P2-2

(P/N 3500-2772-XX)
From P2-1 Monitor To P2-2 ISEM Video Out Function
19 19 RED_VIDEO
37 37 RED_RETURN
18 18 GREEN_VIDEO
36 36 GREEN_RETURN
17 17 BLUE_VIDEO
35 35 BLUE_RETURN
33 33 COMPOSITE_SYNC
15 15 SYNC_RETURN
21 21 RIGHT_SPEAKER+
2 2 RIGHT_SPEAKER-
20 20 LEFT_SPEAKER+
1 1 LEFT_SPEAKER-
3 3 GROUND
11 11 UPHONE+
30 30 UPHONE-
12 12 UPHONE_SHIELD
Table 11-29 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly Jumper, P1-1 to P2-1

(P/N 3500-2772-XX)
From P1-1 Pin To P2-1 Pin Function
5 7 +12 VOLT
8 6 GROUND
24 5 -12 VOLT
6 4 +5 VOLT
NO CONNECTION 25 CONNECT P2-1 PIN 6 GROUND
19 8 SCL
18 27 SDA
20 9 GROUND
Power Cables System and OEM (internal and external) power cables are illustrated in Figure 11-34
through Figure 11-38. Pinout information for these cables is provided in Table 11-30
through Table 11-33.
3500-1482-XX
To hard disk drive
Pin 1 P3
P1 From DDEA PCB
1 8
To optical disk drive

4 5
Pin 1
P2
Table 11-30
Figure 11-34 Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX)

Table 11-30 Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX)

From DDEA PCB To Optical Drive To Hard Drive Function
P1-1 P2-1 - +12 Vdc
P1-2 P2-4 - + 5 Vdc
P1-3 - P3-1 + 12 Vdc
P1-4 - P3-4 + 5 Vdc
P1-5 P2-2 - + 12 Vdc Return
P1-6 P2-3 - + 5 Vdc Return
P1-7 - P3-2 + 12 Vdc Return
P1-8 - P3-3 + 5 Vdc Return
3500-1514-XX
(+)Red
(-)Blk
1
2
22 µf 50 V capacitor
24 V (+) Red
(+)Red
(-)Blk
To ACIM
P506
(-)Blk
(+)Red
(+)Red
(-)Blk
(-)Blk
(Flat side)
Pin 1 (Red)
All Black and Red wire pairs go to individual fans.
Figure 11-35 Fan Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1514-XX)

3500-2616-XX
To ACIM P505
Monitor power Blue
Brown
115 VOLTS 3500-2616-XX 4
3
3
2 2
1 1
Grn/Yel
Shield
See Table 11-31
Figure 11-36 Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX)

Table 11-31 Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX)
To Monitor Power
From P505 on ACIM Connector Function
Pin 1 Pin 1 GND from ACIM (Green/Yellow)
Pin 2 Pin 2 Neutral (Blue)
Pin 3 Pin 3 Line Voltage (Brown) 115V
3500-1517-XX - AAM 1 To 3500-1578 ACIM:

3500-1873-XX - MIC or color printer Hardcopy - P503
3500-2780-XX - VCR VCR - P504
Blue wire (neutral) 4

3
To AAM, MIC, color printer, 2
or VCR 1
3
1
115 Volts
2 3 2
Brown wire (line) 1
(OEM)
Green wire (ground)
Shield wire
1 Power cables are not interchangeable. Lengths will vary.

See Table 11-32
Figure 11-37 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal

Table 11-32 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal

From P503/P504 on To OEM Power
ACIM Connectors Function
Pin 3 Pin 3 Line Voltage (Brown) 115 V
3500-1547-XX - Hardcopy 1 To 3500-1579/1580 ACIM:

3500-2397-XX - MIC Hardcopy - P503
3500-2781-XX - VCR VCR - P504
4
3
2
Blue wire (neutral) 1
To VCR, MIC, 4
or hardcopy
1 2
230 Volts
2 4
Brown wire (line) 1

(OEM)
Green wire (ground)
Shield wire
1 Power cables are not interchangeable. Lengths will vary. See Table 11-33
Figure 11-38 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 230 Vac, Internal

Table 11-33 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 230 Vac, Internal

From P503/P504 on To OEM Power
ACIM Connectors Function
Pin 4 Pin 4 Line Voltage (Brown) 230V
Monitor Internal Monitor internal cabling is illustrated in Figure 11-39.
Cabling NOTE Some of the cables within the video monitor assembly are field replaceable, and
some are not. Cables within the OEM monitor assembly (P/N 2100-1346-XX)
are not field replaceable. If one of the cables in the OEM monitor assembly is
bad, order the video monitor assembly (P/N 3500-2532-XX). Refer to
Figure 11-39 to determine which cables are included with the OEM monitor
assembly.
System Notes for the system interconnect cabling diagrams are provided in Figure 11-40. Sys-
Interconnect tem signal interconnect and power distribution cabling are illustrated in Figure 11-41 and
Cabling Figure 11-42. Signal Interconnect cables are listed in Table 11-34 and power cables are
listed in Table 11-35.
Cabling: Cable Part Numbers
Cable Part
Numbers
Table 11-34 HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables
Part Description
(See Figure 11-41 for the System Cabling and for
Part Number peripheral part numbers) Notes/Reference
2275-0327-01 Cable Assy, AAM Input, Internal See Figure 11-10
2275-0394-01 Cable Assy, AAM Input, Ext, Level 10 See Figure 11-12
2275-0395-01 Cable Assy, AAM-Out, Int, Level 10 See Figure 11-11
2275-0396-01 Cable Assy, AAM-Out, Ext, Level 10 See Figure 11-13
3500-1540-04 Cable Assy, B&W Video Printer See Figure 11-18
3500-2741-01 Cable Assy, Command Module Cover to P3 Remote See Figure 11-29,
Control UIM and Figure 14-34
and Figure 14-38
2275-0335-01 Cable Assy, Codonics Printer, NP1660 See Figure 11-8
3500-1541-04 Cable Assy, Color Video Printer, Internal See Figure 11-19
3500-2644-01 Cable Assy, Color Video Printer, External RGB See Figure 11-20
3500-1835-01 Cable Assy, DDEA, Physio, Jack, See Figure 11-23,
and Figure 14-17
and Figure 14-18
3500-1483-03 Cable Assy, Disk Drive Signal, DDEA See Figure 11-16
and Figure 14-20
3500-1851-01 Cable Assy, Disk Drive, Signal, No MO See Figure 14-21
Table 11-34 HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables (Continued)
Part Description
4500-5512-01 Cable Assy, External Disk Drive Test
2275-0326-01 Cable Assy, External OEM
3500-2642-01 Cable Assy, External SVHS VCR See Figure 11-15
3500-2771-01 Cable Assy, IIM to P2 UIM See Figure 11-32,
and Figure 14-34
3500-2772-01 Cable Assy, ISEM Adapter See Figure 11-33
3500-2770-01 Cable Assy, J1 LCP to P1 UIM See Figure 11-31,
and Figure 14-34
2275-0393-01 Cable Assy, LED, 3 mm Conn, 8-inch L See Figure 11-27,
and Figure 11-39,
and Figure 14-27
3500-2632-02 Cable Assy, Microphone See Figure 14-29
3500-2752-01 Cable Assy, Microphone, Internal, Monitor See Figure 11-30,
and Figure 11-25,
and Figure 11-39,
and Figure 14-27
3500-2643-01 Cable Assy, Mitsubishi RGB, Video Printer See Figure 11-22
3500-2614-02 Cable Assy, Monitor, Lower Bezel See Figure 11-24,
and Figure 11-39,
and Figure 14-27,
and Figure 14-28
Table 11-34 HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables (Continued)
Part Description
3500-2613-01 Cable Assy, Monitor, Upper Bezel See Figure 14-27
3500-2633-02 Cable Assy, Monitor to System, 64-inch See Figure 11-26,
and Figure 11-39
3500-1539-03 Cable Assy, Multi-Image Camera (MIC), Aspect See Figure 11-17
3500-2639-01 Cable Assy, On/Standby Switch See Figure 11-28,
and Figure 14-34
and Figure 14-35
2275-0326-01 Cable Assy, OEM, NI-RGB External See Figure 11-7
2275-0337-01 Cable Assy, Serial Data See Figure 11-9
3500-2641-02 Cable Assy, Sony RGB, Video Printer See Figure 11-21
3500-1404-06 Cable Assy, VCR, Internal See Figure 11-14
2275-0176 Cable, BNC, M/M, GFT, RG 59B/U, 750HM Not Illustrated
2275-0267-01 Cable, RCA-RCA, Stereo, Molded, GFT See Figure 11-6
Table 11-35 HDI 3500 Power Distribution Cables

Part Description
(See Figure 11-42 for power distribution diagram
Part Number and for OEM/peripheral part numbers) Notes/Reference
3500-1873-02 Cable Assy, 100-120 VAC, Dual Hardcopy See Figure 11-37
3500-2397-03 Cable Assy, 230 VAC, Dual Hardcopy See Figure 11-38
3500-1482-03 Cable Assy, Disk Drive Power, DDEA See Figure 11-34,
and Figure 14-16
and Figure 14-17
and Figure 14-21
3500-1514-03 Cable Assy, Fan, 24 VDC See Figure 11-35,
and Figure 14-12
3500-1517-05 Cable Assy, Power, 115 V, Hardcopy See Figure 11-37
3500-1516-05 Cable Assy, Power, 115 V, VCR See Figure 11-37
3500-2780-01 Cable Assy, Power, 115 V, VCR, HDI 5000 See Figure 11-37
3500-1547-05 Cable Assy, Power, 230 V, Hardcopy See Figure 11-38
3500-2781-01 Cable Assy, Power, 230 V, VCR, HDI 5000 See Figure 11-38
3500-2616-01 Cable Assy, Power Monitor, Electrohome See Figure 11-25
2275-0373-01 Cord, PC Adapter, 10A/125 V, 12-inch Not Illustrated
3500-0386-01 Power Cord Assy, 96-inch, 16-Gauge Not Illustrated
Table 11-35 HDI 3500 Power Distribution Cables (Continued)
Part Description
(See Figure 11-42 for power distribution diagram
Part Number and for OEM/peripheral part numbers) Notes/Reference
2275-0324-01 Power Cord, Harmonized, CEE-22 & 7 See Figure 14-22
2275-0388-01
2265-0056-02 Power Cord, Unshld, Hosp Plug See Figure 14-22
2275-0391-01
Cabling: System Cable Diagrams
OEM monitor
HOT P1 Microphone assembly
HOT 2100-1346-XX
Line NEUTRAL INT_MIC+
3
AC NEUTRAL MIC
GROUND 2
power INT_MIC-
GROUND
1 3500-2631-02
3500-2752-01
P4
RED_IN P5
14 LED+
UIF_LIGHT_CONTROL 1
RED_SHIELD 10
1 LED_DRIVE
9 LED
GREEN_IN
15
LED_DRIVE
GREEN_SHIELD SWITCH_SENSE_UP 2
2 4
SWITCH_SENSE_DOWN Monitor
BLUE_IN 3
16 control panel 2275-0393-01
BLUE_SHIELD PCB assembly
3 +5 V
SYNC_IN 5 P3
From 17 GND 7500-1312-XX
2 RIGHT_SPEAKER+ 1
system SYNC_SHIELD 5 + Right
4 GND
signal 1 6 - speaker
SLC RIGHT_SPEAKER- 2
19
connector SDA
Cable P/N 18
P2
3500-2633-02 RIGHT_SPEAKER+ LEFT_SPEAKER+ 1
21 9 2 + Left
RIGHT_SPEAKER- 3 - speaker
22 10 LEFT_SPEAKER- 2
LEFT_SPEAKER+
9 6
LEFT_SPEAKER-
10 7 Light bar PCB assembly
MIC+
11 14
MIC- 15
13 Bulb 3900-0032-01 (8 plcs)
MIC_SHIELD MIC_SHIELD
12 13
+12 V
5 4 -12 V
-12 V 1
24 3
7
GND LAMP_DRV
20 2
7500-1313-XX (PCB)
GND 3500-2614-02
8 1
Note: There are no field-replaceable parts
within the OEM monitor assembly.
MONDIAGRAM 10/16/00
Figure 11-39 Monitor Internal Cabling Diagram

1 2275-0327-XX and 2275-0394-XX = Internal installation

2275-0395-XX and 2275-0396-XX = External installation
2 Do not connect external printer to printer connector on PIM PCB.
3 Part number 4500-5512-01 is an external disk drive test cable.
4 To obtain video loop-through when the ISEM is installed, video is routed from the monitor
connector on the IIM PCB to the ISEM Video In and out the ISEM Video Out connector to
the monitor. (Two 3500-2633-XX cables are required.)
5 When the ISEM is not installed, only one 3500-2633-XX is required.
6 Mitsubishi printer only.
7 Connect this end to P503 or P504 for UP5600 printer installation.
8 If a UP5600 is installed, disconnect the main transformer connector to P501 on the ACIM.
Connect the UP5600 as shown.
9 ON/STANDBY switch controls system logic voltage to turn ultrasound system ON & OFF.
Figure 11-40 Notes for HDI 3500 Signal/Power Interconnect Diagram

3500-2771-01 Microphone
3500-2639-01 3500-2632-02
3500-2752-01
P1
On/Standby switch 2275-0326-01 Internal cable
P2 J1 3500-2741-01
P3
3500-2614-02
Speakers System
Remote control port External monitor monitor
User 4 3500-2633-02
Interface
Module P1 4 3500-2633-02 5 3500-2633-02
3500-2770-01
Centerplane PCB
PIM/A2B DDEA/A1F IIM/A1B ADAPTR/A9B CPU/A6B
Control
Optical drive Panel
J1 NI-RGB 3500-1483-03 Ext. serial

printer
3500-2644-01 Monitor Ext. VCR
I-RGB audio out 10101 serial
Lower User Interface
3500-2642-01 P4
S-VID Ext. VCR
VCR audio in
CVID out E-Net
ECG
3500-2772-01
Track- Key- Video Hand CVID in
ball board switch controller Pulse Hardcopy
B&W VID
Phono
Ext.
2 printer Footswitch
SCIP
Hard
drive E-Net
3 4500-5512-01
Trackball Keyboard Video Video

ISEM in out 2
3500-2644-01 External 3500-1540-04
SYNC SYNC RED RED GRN GRN BLUE BLUE 6 3500-2643-01 Printer
IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
External
2275-0176 Hardcopy device 3500-1404-06
3500-2641-02
3500-1540-04
2275-0327-01 Panasonic VCR MD830
1 2275-0267-01
2275-0394-01 (Ext. install) B/W video printer
3500-2642-01 2275-0267-01
3500-2644-01 (Int. install)
Footswitch 3500-2641-02
External SVHS VCR
3500-1539-03
Video in Mitsubishi Color Printer
AAM control Video out References to the flag notes are on Figure 11-40
2275-0395-01 5000SIGDIAG 10/13/00
panel 1
Access Acquisition Module 2275-0396-01 Figure 11-41 HDI 3500 System Signal Interconnect Diagram
Multi-image camera
3500-2639-01
System
9
monitor
On/Standby switch
Fans
3500-1514-03
P1 J1 AC in
P3
3500-2616-01
User
Interface
Module P2
Centerplane PCB
ACIM/PS4
DDEA/A1F +24 VDC
P506
P508
Optical drive
P505
3500-2780-01, 120V P507
3500-1482-03
3500-2781-01, 240V P504
Lower User Interface
P503 7
ECG
P502
Pulse
ISEM Phono P501
Footswitch
Hard 8
drive
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz
3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
3500-1873-02
3500-1517-05, 120V 120V 60Hz
3500-2397-03
3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz
3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz
3500-1547-05 240V 50Hz

6
240V, CP50E Main OEM
Access Acquisition Module transformer transformer
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz
Sony Color Printer UP5600
3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz
3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
Cables are part of Cables are part of
Panasonic VCR
transformer transformer
Mitsubishi Color Printer MD830 26010052XX 26010058XX
Multi-image camera References to the flag notes are on Figure 11-40 5000PWRDIAG 3/30/98
Hardcopy device Figure 11-42 HDI 3500 System Power Interconnect Diagram
B/W video printer
Change History: 150.XX Software Releases
12 Change History
This section lists the software and hardware changes associated with a specific software
release number. Unless noted under the Hardware Changes paragraph, the hardware
changes are not required for that particular software release.
The part numbers listed after the software versions are the optical disk part numbers for
that software version.
150.XX
Software
Releases
Features Broadband Linear Array Scanheads
Supported • L7-4 40 mm
• LAP L9-5 (laparoscopic)
• L10-5 38 mm
• CL10-5 (compact linear)
• L12-5 38 mm
• L12-5 50 mm
Broadband Curved Array

• C3.5 76 mm
• C4-2 40 mm
• C5-2 40R
• C5 IVT 11 mm (intra-vaginal)
• C7-4 40 mm
• C9-5 ICT 8 mm (intracavity)
• C8-4v
• CT8-4
• C8-5 14R
Broadband Phased Array

• P3-2 20 mm
• P4-2 20 mm
• P5-3
• P7-4
• MPT 7-4 (multi-plane transesophageal)
• BPT 9-5 (biplane transesophageal)
Doppler Transducers
• TCD Static D2 TC
• D2 CW
• D5 CW
• D10 CW
Miscellaneous Features
• 3D Grayscale
• Tissue Harmonic Imaging
• High Q Cardiac Output/Volume Flow
• DiskLink/NetLink short loops
• VCR controls on the control panel
Features Not • Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI)

Supported • Modality Worklist
• Sono CT
• Intelligent Frame Rate Accelerator
• DVS®
• The following UpLink functions
- Some low-level diagnostic tests are not implemented
- Image transfer capability is intermittent
- PCM flash reload is not functional
150.23 (8.5.1 Initial release 4252-0831-06 on July 2, 1999.

build level)
New Features
Refer to Features Supported in software version 150.XX.
Problems Corrected
Not applicable.
Known Problems
Refer to Operating Notes:
4707-0036-02 English
4777-0036-02 German
4787-0036-02 French
4797-0036-02 Spanish
4807-0036-02 Dutch
4817-0036-02 Swedish
4827-0036-02 Italian
4837-0036-02 Finnish
4847-0036-02 Brazilian
4877-0036-02 Portuguese
4887-0036-02 Danish
4907-0036-02 Greek
Hardware Changes
There are no hardware changes.
150.24 (8.5.2 Released 4252-0831-07 on February 18, 2000.

build level)
New Features
None.
Problems Corrected
Software version 150.24 deletes obsolete UART tests from the FEC and ADAPTR PCB,
tests in the Machine Comprehensive Test. New versions of the FEC PCB
(P/N 7500-1526-XX) and ADAPTR PCB (P/N 7500-1328-XX) do not have the obsolete
UART, which caused failure of the Comprehensive Test.
Known Problems
4707-0036-03 English
4777-0036-03 German
4787-0036-03 French
4797-0036-03 Spanish
4807-0036-03 Dutch
4817-0036-03 Swedish
4827-0036-03 Italian
4837-0036-03 Finnish
4887-0036-03 Danish
4907-0036-03 Greek
Hardware Changes
There are no hardware changes required for this software version, however, the FEC and
ADAPTR were changed to delete obsolete UART tests. Software revision 150.24 sup-
ports those changes. See “Problems Corrected” on page 315.
151.06 (8.5.3 Released SW P/N 4252-0886-06 on June 07, 2000.

build level) Field upgrade SW P/N 4252-0896-05
New Features
All features of the previous software version (150.24 software). There are no new fea-
tures released with this software version.
Problems Corrected
• Corrects an intermittent problem that prevents the Doppler spectral trace from updat-
ing when the sample volume cursor is moved.
• Improves system response to the Freeze control. Also improves system response
times due to TGC slidepot or other control activation during periods of high PCM
activity.
• Corrects an issue with the OB graph causing current measurement values to not be
displayed in the year 2000.
• Adds a low-level optical disk format option to the user diagnostics menu. Performing a
low-level optical disk format enables faster disk operation.
• Allows the user to perform a CW exam using the D2CW probe when the BPT9-5
scanhead is connected. Previously, there was no Doppler signal when this was
attempted.
• Prevents the system from hanging after deleting all images from the hard disk if one
of the images is not readable. Unreadable images may result from turning off the sys-
tem before the image has been fully saved to disk, a hard disk error, or a power sup-
ply problem.
• Corrects a DiskLink issue with the patient exam directory showing patient exams as
being sent to the optical disk when they are not.
• Corrects an issue preventing the time from displaying during system bootup. Previ-
ously, performing a system reboot corrected the problem, but system reboot had to be
done with the circuit breaker.
• Fixes blue banner messages reporting FEC line sequencer errors when in 2D-PW.
• Eliminates errors caused by the system being unable to update after a menu selec-
tion following another menu selection.
• Prevents the system from hanging under certain conditions when a measurement
protocol is used and Select is pressed when the cursor is in a scroll bar.
• Fixes intermittent crashes occurring after the bootup splash screen.
• Fixes an intermittent blue banner error message (“FILE:VPM clock monitor. Line
Number 400”) occurring on system bootup.
• Corrects an intermittent problem causing the time to disappear from the display after
system bootup. Attempts to shut the system off with the Standby switch failed. The
issue was seen primarily on PAL systems.
Known Problems
4707-0036-04 English
4777-0036-04 German
4787-0036-04 French
4797-0036-04 Spanish
4807-0036-04 Dutch
4817-0036-04 Swedish
4827-0036-04 Italian
4837-0036-04 Finnish
4887-0036-04 Danish
4907-0036-04 Greek
Hardware Changes
151.09 (8.5.4 Released SW P/N 4252-0886-09 on March 15, 2001.

New Features
• All features released with the previous software, version 151.06
• New ATL C8~5 curved array scanhead (P/N 4000-0800-XX)
C8-5 Curved Array Scanhead
The ATL-made C8~5 scanhead (P/N 4000-0800-XX) looks and performs the same as
the previously released C8-5 Thompson-made scanhead, but has better mechanical
integrity and improved reliability. The redesigned ATL-made scanhead is identified as
“C8~5” on the scanhead connector label and on the system display. The scanhead spec-
ifications are the same as those for the previously released scanhead and are listed in
Section 15, “Scanheads”. The new ATL C8~5 scanhead requires a new MO file. Refer to
Hot Tip 2000-55 for the C8-5 scanhead replacement strategy for all HDI systems.
Problems Corrected
• The loss of exam data while spooling images to the hard disk due to a pegasus task
crash during normal system shutdown.
• A system crash when the system date rolls while in OB report.
• Missing key stroke entries in the User Events Log when it is downloaded.
• Decreases bootup time required for systems with a full hard disk.
• Abnormal system behavior under certain operating conditions when the system is in
dual imaging and you reselect a scanhead.
• A high failure rate of the ADAPTR PIT test executed during the Machine Comprehen-
sive Test.
• System slowdown and lockup in duplex Doppler mode after changing the display for-
mat size with only the 2D active.
• Image from a patient study migrates to the next patient study.
• Changes imaging thermal limits in AP&I software used by the following scanheads:
C5-IVT, L10-5, C9-5 ICT, C8-4, L7-4, P3-2, P 5-3, the Thompson-made C8-5 scan-
head (PN 4000-0676-XX), and the ATL made C8~5 scanhead (PN 4000-0800-XX).
• Prevents the system from pegasus task crashing when selecting Final Report after
editing the analysis report. This resolution only affects customers who have an Oki-
data report printer selected in the Peripherals setup menu.
• A bright line image artifact appears at the bottom of the sector using THI.
• French translation error performing the calculation dP/dt, Mitral Regurg.
• Return the scanhead position function to SH pos key on system keyboard.
Known Problems
4707-0036-06 English
4777-0036-06 German
4787-0036-06 French
4797-0036-06 Spanish
4807-0036-06 Dutch
4817-0036-06 Swedish
4827-0036-06 Italian
4837-0036-06 Finnish
4887-0036-06 Danish
4907-0036-06 Greek
Hardware Changes
151.11 (8.5.5 Released SW P/N 4252-0886-11 on August 3, 2001.

New Features
None.
Problems Corrected
• Improves handling of network-device-association aborts.
• Eliminates many XIO errors from PCM crashes by upgrading PCM flash RAM.
• Enables CRC check as an option during the upgrade process and uses 151.09 as the
previous build.
• Fixes incorrect gray shades and improves dull images sent to network devices and
spooled to the MO disk. This change does not affect images displayed on the system
monitor. The FSE must enable this feature by creating a file on the system hard drive.
To create the file, type Skcreat”/hd0/peg_hd/site/netcfg/brighten”,”0” into the
VxWorks command line. To delete the feature, type Skrm”/hd0/peg_hd0/site/
netcfg/brighten
• Removes the Topo setting from the PWR softkey menu.
• Fixes a power monitor fault with the C8-4 scanhead running GYN application.
Known Problems
4707-0036-07 English
4777-0036-07 German
4787-0036-07 French
4797-0036-07 Spanish
4807-0036-07 Dutch
4817-0036-07 Swedish
4827-0036-07 Italian
4837-0036-07 Finnish
4887-0036-07 Danish
4907-0036-07 Greek
Hardware Changes
151.12 (8.5.6 Released SW P/N 4252-0886-12 on March 15, 2001.

New Features
None.
Problems Corrected
Changes the error reporting status for the Image Memory Module bootup test to avoid
intermittent blue banner messages. Errors are noted in the bootup status results in the
user diagnostics and documented in the description field of the NVRAM non-volatile
memory log during system power down. This issue occurred only with Pixel Conversion
Module 7500-1769-04 installed, which requires 151.12 software.
Known Problems
4707-0036-08 English
4777-0036-08 German
4787-0036-08 French
4797-0036-08 Spanish
4807-0036-08 Dutch
4817-0036-08 Swedish
4827-0036-08 Italian
4837-0036-08 Finnish
4887-0036-08 Danish
4907-0036-08 Greek
Hardware Changes
Configuration: Compatibility
13 Configuration
Compatibility The part number, dash level, and firmware software level of each PCB is determined by
the CPU at bootup.
The system software contains a hardware and software configuration file that lists the
part numbers and dash levels of installed PCBs and PROMs. If a different dash level
PCB or PROM is installed, and “Save as Installed” is then selected, this file is updated.
This should only be done if the replacement has been determined to be compatible with
the system configuration. The original configuration information cannot be retrieved after
this file is modified. Refer to “Troubleshooting” on page 185 for more information.
NOTE Some PCBs do not report their proper dash numbers. On systems that report
the dash numbers incorrectly, the system covers must be removed to determine
the correct PCB part number. Contact TSG for information if needed.
NOTE Hardware configuration and compatibility must be based on the information in

the PCB and PROM replacement matrices. Hardware configuration involves ver-
ifying the PCBs and PROMs are compatible with the specific system software.
PCB The HDI 3500 primary PCB locations are shown in Figure 13-1 (front card cage) and
Locations and Figure 13-2 (rear card cage). Refer to the HDI 3500 Master Compatibility Matrix for part
numbers.
Replacement
Information
Configuration: PCB Locations and Replacement Information
Doppler Acquisition PCB (DOPACQ), A6F Channel Boards (CB0-CB7), A7F-A14F

Analog Interface Module PCB (AIM), A5F
Front End Controller PCB (FEC), A4F
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
Centerplane PCB
PS1 PS2 PS3
A1F A2F A3F A4F A5F A6F A7F A8F A9F A10F A11F A12F A13F A14F
(Behind modules)
See Figure 11-5
Scanhead Select
Module (S/HSEL)
Disk Drive Module See Figure 14-5
(DDEA), A1F See Figure 14-15
See Figure 14-5
See Figure 14-15 See the HDI 3500 Master
Compatibility Matrix for
Power Supply Module part numbers.
(PSM), PS2
See Figure 11-1
Figure 13-1 Primary System PCB Names and Locations (Front Card Cage)
Configuration: Usage Rules for PROM Matrices
Pixel Space Processor 1 PCB (PSP1), A5B System CPU PCB (SYSCPU), A6B
Pixel Space Processor 1 PCB (PSP2), A4B Image Memory PCB (IMEM), A8B
Pixel Conversion Module PCB (PCM), A3B Adv. Digital/Audio/Physio and Translator
Peripheral Interface Module PCB (PIM), A2B PCB (ADAPTR), A9B
Internal Interface Module PCB Sample Space Proc. PCB (SSP2), A11B
(IIM), A1B Adv. IF Output Module PCB (AIFOM), A13B
A A A A A A A A A A A A A PS5 PS4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
AC Input Module
(ACIM), PS4/PS5
See Figure 11-4
See Figure 14-22
See the HDI 3500 Master

part numbers
Figure 13-2 Primary System PCB Names and Locations (Rear Card Cage)
Usage Rules A number of PCBs require operating software PROMs (firmware). The software for the
for PROM CPU determines the overall system software level (for example, 23.04). The software on
other PCBs will never be higher than that of the CPU, and can be at a lower level.
Matrices
Configuration: Usage Rules for Jumper and PROM Diagrams
System features may or may not be compatible with a specific PCB revision. The differ-
ent codes that can be found here are:
Y - yes, feature is compatible with this PCB dash level,
N - no, feature is not compatible with this PCB dash level.
Order the software PROM kit required by the PCB part number being ordered.
Usage Rules • There are no jumpers that require configuration by field service representatives.
for Jumper • There are no switches on PCBs.
and PROM • There are no diagrams for PCBs that do not have jumper headers or firmware
Diagrams PROMs installed.
• The relative position of firmware PROMs and certain jumpers are shown on the
jumper and PROM diagrams.
• Only those jumpers requiring headers are shown on these diagrams.
• Jumpers requiring a jumper header are shown only for reference when verifying their
integrity.
• If the jumper has three pins, the physical position of the header is indicated.
• It is understood, if jumpers are not shown on the diagram, they are either hard-wired
or are not jumpered with a header.
System Part numbers for Software Files listed in Table 13-1 are for reference because the part
Software number is displayed on the system monitor (Setups - Diagnostics - Show Machine Con-
figuration) and on the Operating Notes.
Machine Option (MO) files must be ordered for a specific system. Request optical disk
4252-0738-01 and specify the system S.O. and I.D. numbers. An optical disk will then be
created for that system I.D.
Configuration: System Software
Follow your local upgrade program to order upgrade disks. Upgrade disks with system
software automatically back up the old system software and machine options, copy the
new software, perform the software integrity scan, and transfer user presets. Messages
are displayed on the system monitor to provide status of the installation process. If an
error is detected during the installation process, the system automatically restores the
previous software.
.
Configuration: Repairing DDEA Modules
Table 13-1 System Software Level Part Numbers
Software Build Part Numbers

Level Level
Software Upgrade Disk
Files1 Dash w/System S/W Notes
150.23 8.5.1 4252-0831 06
150.24 8.5.2 4252-0831 07
151.06 8.5.3 4252-0886 06 4252-0896-05
151.09 8.5.4 4252-0886 09 4252-0896-07
151.11 8.5.5 4252-0886 11 4252-0896-09
151.12 8.5.6 4252-0886 12 4252-0896-10
1. The part numbers in this column are for reference only and cannot be ordered. Software language is generic. Lan-
guage displayed is determined by customer Machine Option Files. Upper and Lower Control Panels are in English,
French, German, and Italian. To support Danish, Norwegian, Swedish, and Finnish languages, key caps for the Lower
Control Panel are available (Figure 14-34).
Repairing Repair all DDEA modules to the component level whenever possible. Order the entire
DDEA DDEA assembly only when replacing unreliable or unrepairable modules.
Modules • Determine the DDEA configuration, (with or without ECG and MO drive).
• The DDEA Interface PCB and the optical drive must be ordered like for like.
• Use Table 13-2 to order DDEA replaceable components.
• Follow “Hard Drive Replacement” on page 334 in this section for hard drive failures.
• When replacing any drive in a DDEA module with a different model, the SCSI bus ter-
mination should be checked. Use the figures and tables in “Drive Jumper and Switch
Settings” on page 337.
• The MO drive SCSI connector must be terminated when the IBM hard drive is
installed. DDEA modules with or without an optical drive have the same hard drive
SCSI termination settings.
Table 13-2 DDEA Replaceable Components
Notes /
Part Number Part Description Reference
3500-3066-03 System hard drive kit, IBM 9.1 Gb1 Figure 14-17
Table 13-5 Mag Optical Drive, 640 MB, Fujitsu M2513 Figure 14-20
Mag Optical Drive, 640 MB, Fujitsu
MCC3064SS
See Master DDEA PCB with ECG Physio circuitry Figure 14-17
Compatibility
Matrix
DDEA PCB w/o ECG Figure 14-16
3100-0274 ECG Connector (plastic spacer below may also Figure 14-17
be needed)
1064-0130-02 Spacer, plastic, ECG connector Figure 14-17
CAUTION HD and MO drives are very delicate. Follow ESD procedures and handle with care to
avoid electrical and physical shock damage during hard drive removal and installation.
Hard Drive Before replacing the hard drive, verify the hard disk is defective. Refer to “Core Bootup
Replacement Fault Isolation” on page 185, and “Check Installed Software” on page 206 under Diag-
nostics in the Setups menu.
Run the “recovery disk” if a problem is suspected. If “no” errors or inconsistent errors are
found, skrm the hard drive and reload software.
If errors are found repetitively after loading new software and running the recovery disk
several times, replace the drive. If MO files are defective, obtain the files via email from
Bothell or your technical support center and replace them.
➤ To replace a system hard drive:

1. Remove the DDEA module.
2. Determine whether the drive is an IBM or Quantum drive.
3. Order hard drive kit (Table 13-3, P/N 3500-3066-02) to replace a Quantum or
non-IBM drive, or order IBM hard drive (P/N 3500-3129-01) to replace an IBM drive.
When ordering a pre-loaded drive:
a. Request that the software and options be loaded.
b. Enter the current software level (the 4252-XXXX-XX part number) as a separate
line item. Obtain the part number from the system configuration information in the
system setups or refer to Table 13-1.
c. Include a base ID (chip ID) and the machine options part number 4252-0738-01
for domestic orders. International made-for-stock orders do not require a base ID.
NOTE Do not order blank hard drives (P/N 2100-XXXX-XX). Blank drives are unformat-
ted and cannot read or write data. Also, do not replace a hard drive during a
software upgrade unless it is part of the upgrade.
4. Remove the drive.
CAUTIONS • Use extreme care when handling drives. Hold drive by the sides, being cautious not
to touch or bump printed circuits, electrical components, or moving mechanical parts.
• Do not rest the drive on surfaces other than the anti-static mat, approved packing
materials, or the actual mounting position in the DDEA.
• Handle drives using static discharge prevention methods including anti-static mats
and ground straps.
5. Set the hard drive jumpers according to “Drive Jumper and Switch Settings” on
page 337.
6. Install the drive.
7. Install the DDEA module.
8. Performance test the system.
9. If the drive must be returned to Bothell, package the drive in the replacement drive
packaging before returning it.
Table 13-3 Hard Drive Kit

Part Number Components Notes/Reference
3500-3066-04 System hard drive kit, IBM 18.3 Gb,
2100-1838-02 • Hard Disk Drive, IBM 18.3 Gb, 10k-rpm, Formatted disk
U160, SCSI, 68P Figure 14-16
2208-0064 • Cable Clamp, FL, 3-in, Adhesive Back
3100-2867-01 • Conn, SCSI-3, 68m/50m Adapt, w/98 Term
3100-2896-01 • Conn, Jumper, 1x2, 2mm CTC
3500-3333-01 • Cable Assy, DDEA Module Drives
3500-3334-01 • Cable Assy, DDEA Module Drives (Svc)
Drive Jumper Set hard drive jumpers in accordance with those in Table 13-4 and Figure 13-3. Set MO
and Switch drive jumpers in accordance with those in Figure 13-4 and Table 13-5.
Settings
Table 13-4 Hard Drive Jumper/LED Status1
Jumper/LED Status2
Drive Part Number Drive Size3 (MB) A0 A1 A2 P0 PK TE LED Reserved
2100-1445-01 2100 OFF OFF OFF - OFF ON OFF OFF
2100-1517-01 3200 OFF OFF OFF - OFF ON OFF OFF
2100-1636-014 9100 OFF OFF OFF OFF JP4-6 JP4-5 JP6-G -
ON ON ON
1. Jumper positions listed are for DDEA module with MO drive installed. DDEA modules without MO drive have no jump-
ers installed.
2. OFF indicates a jumper is not connected, ON indicates a jumper is connected. The dashes indicate no jumper available
on that hard drive.
3. All hard drives are formatted to 2100 MB because of operating system constraints.
4. The 2100-1636-01 IBM hard drive requires the 3100-2867-01 68 to 50-pin adapter. Hard drive jumper positions are the
same for DDEAs, with or without MO drives installed. If no MO drive is installed, connect a terminator to the connector
on the front of the DDEA module.
Option Jumper
Block J-6 Reserved Position A
A B C D E F ( )
Reserved
Ground J-6 Option Jumper Block J-6
Reserved
Reserved Position G
Connector
Reserved
Open Open PCB
SCSI bus Enable terminal pwr supply
Position 1
Option Jumper
Block J-4 J-4 Option Jumper Block J-4
DAS3
1 (2) (3) 4 ( )
DAS2
SCSI ID Position 12
DAS1
DAS0 Note: 80 pin models do not have Option Jumper Block J-6.
Ground Enable auto spin up (68 pin)
Disable auto spin up (80 pin)
Force SE mode - Location of Option Jumper Blocks -
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Disable unit attention
Enable TI-SDTR/WDTR
Enable auto start delay
Delay start 6/12
Disable SCSI parity check
LED anode LED cathode
- Jumper settings for 68/80 pin LVD/SE multi-mode models -
Figure 13-3 IBM Hard Drive SCSI Termination

Table 13-5 Magneto-Optical Drive Switch/Jumper Positions

Switch/Jumper Positions
Drive Part Number Drive Size (MB) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2100-1416-01 540/640 SW1 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
540/640 SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
540/640 CNH OFF OFF OFF - - - - -
2100-1512-01 640 SW1 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Power connector
Set switch 8 to ON to enable
SCSI connector the SCSI termination.
CNH1
246 SW1
OFF
Drive switch location
135
12345678
- Fujitsu optical drive rear view - ON
SCSI ID TERM NORM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- Top view of Panasonic

- Epson optical drive rear view - optical drive -
Figure 13-4 MO Drive SCSI Termination

Table 13-6 A4F FEC PROMs

7500-1529 PROM Kit Replacement Levels
150.23
Dash No. Part No. and up Location, P/N, Dash
01,02,03 8000-1579 01 R U24 4201-2011 02
U25 4201-2012 02
U10 4201-1582 08
Table 13-7 A4F FEC PROM Checksums and CRCs

PROM Part No. Dash No. Checksum CRC
4201-1582 08 4C23 CCA3
4201-2011 02 3593 6100
4201-2012 02 EB6A 6100
U24
U25
1 U10
JP5
JP8
1
Figure 13-5 FEC Jumper and PROM Locations

Table 13-8 A3B PCM PROMs
Replacement Levels
PROM Kit Part 150.23
Part No. No. and up Location, P/N, Dash
7500-1408 03 8000-0991 03 R U23 4201-1718 09
04
7500-1769 02 8000-1374 01 R U20 4201-1962 01
U49 4201-1582 08
Table 13-9 A3B PCM PROM Checksums and CRCs

4201-1718 09 CAD5 F557
S1 S1 = PCB
RESET
1 SWITCH
U23
JP1
Figure 13-6 PCM Jumper and PROM Locations

Table 13-10 A5B PSP1 PROMs

150.23
14, 17 8000-0992 04 R U55 4201-1697 13
U134 4201-1582 08
Table 13-11 A5B PSP1 PROM Checksums and CRCs

4201-1697 13 03E3 B4B9
4201-1582 08 4C23 CCA3
U55
JP19 U134
1
1
JP21
Figure 13-7 PSP1 Jumper and PROM Locations

Table 13-12 A6B CPU PROMs

150.23
01, 02, 03 8000-1663 04 R U57 4201-1582 08
R U68 4201-2015 04
R U59 4201-2016 04
01, 02, 03 8000-1663 05 R U57 4201-1582 08
R U68 4201-2015 05
R U59 4201-2016 05
Table 13-13 A6B CPU PROM Checksums and CRCs

4201-1582 08 4C23 CCA3
4201-2015 04 EF4F 758D
4201-2016 04 38A3 758D
4201-2015 05 3B6E
4201-2016 05 D803
Note: When replacing the

CPU PCB, remove the ID chip
(B1) and install it on the ID
replacement CPU PCB.
B1
U57
U59
U68
Figure 13-8 CPU PROM Locations (3500-2677-XX)

Table 13-14 A9B ADAPTR PROMs

150.23 150.24
Dash No. Part No. and up and up Location, P/N, Dash
01 - 05 8000-0995 03 R U52 4201-1693 08
R U56
Table 13-15 A9B ADAPTR PROM Checksums and CRCs

4201-1582 08 4C23 CCA3
4201-1693 08 71CB 63A5
U52
U56
Figure 13-9 ADAPTR PROM Locations

Table 13-16 A11B SSP PROMs

150.23
07, 09, 8000-0997 02 A U32 4201-1694 07
U113 4201-1582 08
10 - 12 8000-0997 02 R U32 4201-1694 07
U113 4201-1582 08
Table 13-17 A11B SSP PROM Checksums and CRCs

4201-1582 08 4C23 CCA3
4201-1694 07 8956 99CD
U32
U113
Figure 13-10 SSP PROM Locations

Table 13-18 A13B AIFOM PROMs

Replacement Levels
PROM Kit Part 150.23
Part No. No. and up Location, P/N, Dash
7500-1413 01 8000-1374- 01 A U26 4201-1961 01
7500-1413 02 8000-1374- 01 R U20 4201-1962 01
03
U49 4201-1582 08
Table 13-19 A13B AIFOM PROM Checksums and CRCs

4201-1582 08 4C23 CCA3
4201-1961 01 0844 540C
4201-1962 01 67D0 540C
U20
U26
U49
Figure 13-11 AIFOM PROM Locations

Parts: Introduction
14 Parts
Introduction This section lists parts information for the HDI 3500 system. Replacement parts that are
dependent upon system features have the full part number listed in the replacement
tables in Section 13, “Configuration”.
Use the figures and parts table in this section to locate and identify system parts. Part
numbers are shown on the illustrations as well as listed and described in the correspond-
ing tables. Figures are keyed to the tables and the tables to the figures, as applicable.
Use the part number and description provided as needed to order a part. Verify that the
level of replacement for a given part is in accordance with current service philosophy of
your area before ordering the part.
Parts Field Service Engineers

Ordering For parts ordering procedures, FSEs should refer to their standard operating procedures.
Information Customers
Customers may order parts through an FSE or directly from the Customer Service Order
Processing Department. Customers ordering parts through an FSE will need to provide
the following information:
• Shipping address
• Purchase order number of equipment
• Part numbers or sales order numbers
• Part descriptions and quantity needed
Parts: Parts Ordering Information
How to Find a In this section, part numbers in the exploded view system illustrations (figures) point to
Part Number the system parts. The part numbers in these figures link to the parts table (Table 14-1)
containing descriptive information about the part. The parts table, arranged as follows, is
alphabetized by description for your convenience. Additional tables (Table 14-2) lists the
system accessories and (Table 14-3) lists peripherals and applicable cables.
Using the Figures and Tables

➤ How to use the figures and tables in this section:
• If you need a part number, find the drawing of the part in the appropriate figure. The
part number or reference to where the part number appears points to the drawing. If
you need the part description, click on the blue part number hypertext link to go to the
corresponding item in the parts table.
• If you have the part number and want to look up the description in the table, use Acro-
bat Reader’s Find function to locate the part number. Then, if needed, you can click
on the blue hypertext figure link to go to the corresponding illustration.
• If you are using a printed version of this manual and need more than just the part
number shown on the figure, the parts are alphabetized in the table by description so
you can look up the part by description.
Parts Table Definitions
Located On. This column lists all of the figures on which the part is found.
Part Number. This column lists the part number for an item. Use this number when
ordering parts. If a table is referenced in this column, the part number is on that table. For
example, the part numbers for cables and many PCBs are in Section 11, “Cabling”, and
Section 13, “Configuration”, respectively.
If an item does not include a part number, this indicates that the item is included for refer-
ence, but is not a field-replaceable part.
Part Description. The name of the item or part is listed here. Where appropriate, the
description column also includes size, tolerance, type or model, and material data for the
part. Table 14-1 is alphabetized by this column.
Attaching parts must be ordered separately. They are not provided with the assembly,
subassembly, or component being attached.
Notes/Reference. Manufacturer's part numbers, sometimes alternate part numbers,
special applications, and other information pertaining to a specific part are listed in the
Notes/Reference column. For top assemblies containing many replaceable parts, the
applicable figure or table for further breakdown of parts is listed here. Other references
are here if the part requires special cabling, setup, or assembly instructions.
Figure Definitions
Part Number. The part number for each part or subassembly shown in an illustration is a
hypertext cross-reference linking to the table containing parts descriptions and additional
information.
See Figure. “See Figure” is a hypertext link to a sub-assembly figure. In the subassem-
bly figure, you will find the part number, a reference to another figure, or a reference to a
table containing the parts description.
See Table. “See Table” is a hypertext link to the table containing parts descriptions and
additional information.
Parts: Parts Illustrations
Parts
Illustrations
VCR support
See Figure 14-32
Upper UIF assembly Video monitor assembly
See Figure 14-34 See Figure 14-26
Lower UIF assembly

See Figure 14-34
3500-1535-01
3500-1730-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-1 HDI 3500 Main Components and Option

1065-4638-01
3000-0681-02
1065-2254-04
1065-4695-01
1518-0051 See Figure 14-4
1065-4694-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-2 HDI 3500 System, External Small Parts (1 of 2)

3500-2739-01
1065-2370-02
1541-0002
1065-5280-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-3 HDI 3500 System, External Small Parts (2 of 2)

1065-2899-01
1065-2901-01
3500-1834-01
See Table 14-1 Cable drape assembly
Figure 14-4 Cable Drape Assembly

See Figure 13-1

See Figure 14-15
See Figure 14-7
1560-0051
1518-0043
2950-1148-01
See Figure 14-13
See Figure 13-1
See Table 14-1 See Figure 14-15
Figure 14-5 HDI 3500 System, Front (1 of 2)

1065-5222-01
1065-5224-01
1065-5221-02
1065-5223-02
1516-0113
3500-1877-01 3500-1876-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-6 HDI 3500 System, Front (2 of 2)

1065-2882-03
1065-2973-01 1516-0113
1065-2954-01
4100-1548-01
1065-2953-01
1516-0113
3500-1871-03
See Table 14-1 Front cover assembly
Figure 14-7 Front Cover Assembly

1065-2385-04 1065-2386-01 See Figure 14-22
See Figure 14-10 2601-0052-06
See Figure 14-12
1065-2254-04 See Figure 14-22 1541-0002

1560-0051 2950-0782-01
See Figure 14-13
1518-0043
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-8 HDI 3500 System, Rear (1 of 2)

1065-4945-01
1516-0113
1065-4704-01
1065-2255-06 3500-1878-04
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-9 HDI 3500 System, Rear (2 of 2)

1065-2892-04
4100-1255-01 4100-1387-01
4100-1256-01
4100-0961-02
2950-1179-01 (Not part of assembly)
4100-1548-01
1560-0051
1518-0043
3500-1872-03/04
See Table 14-1 Rear cover assembly
Figure 14-10 Rear Cover Assembly

Network transceiver
1065-5623-01
1065-5622-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-11 Rear Cover Detail (Transceiver Bracket)

3500-1514-03
2100-0839-01
2100-0856-01
1065-2365-03
1516-0074
1541-0002
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-12 24VDC Fans (Rear Panel)

Front caster assembly Rear caster assembly

2950-0657-09 2950-1278-03
2950-1389-02 2950-1388-02
1530-0360-01
1530-0157-01
1560-0020 1065-5096-01
1065-2611-02
(Inside Frame)
1519-0034
1561-0001
2950-0818-02
2950-1447-01
See Table 14-1 2950-0857-01
Figure 14-13 Caster Assembly, Swivel Type (Front and Rear)

2950-0857-01
1560-0020
2950-0818-02 1561-0001
1519-0022
2950-1278-04
1544-0012 Axle type caster assembly
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-14 System Casters, Axle Type (Rear)

DDEA module assembly PCB locations

Without ECG See Figure 13-1
See Figure 14-16
Physio
PS1 PS2 PS3
See Figure 14-17 A1F A2F A3F A4F A5F A6F A7F A8F A9F A10F A11F A12F A13F A14F
Without MO drive
1065-2732-02
See Figure 14-18
Without ECG, MO and physio
See Figure 14-19

1563-0258-01
part numbers
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-15 Card Cage, Front

Dependency kits See Figure 14-20

3500-1482-03
8000-1900-01 1065-1946-05
8000-1969-01
8000-2001-01
1541-0002 2100-1517-01
1065-4681-01
1516-0113
2950-1041-01
2950-1040-01
1065-1947-03
3100-1387-01 1541-0002
Disk Drive Module Assy,

3600-0246-01 9903-0338-01
See Table 14-1 without ECG
Figure 14-16 DDEA Module Assembly (Without ECG)


8000-1900-01 3500-1482-03
1065-1946-05
8000-1969-01
8000-2001-01
SeeTable 13-3
for HD Kit
1541-0002 3500-3129-01
1065-4681-01
1516-0113
1065-1947-03
1541-0002
3100-1387-01
3600-0246-01
3500-1835-01
1064-0130-02 9903-0338-01 Physio
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-17 DDEA Module Assembly (Physio)


8000-1900-01 1065-1946-05
8000-2001-01
2100-1445-01
See Figure 14-21
1516-0113
1065-1947-03
1541-0002
3100-1387-01
3600-0246-01
3500-1835-01
1064-0130-02 9903-0338-01
See Table 14-1 Physio, No MO
Figure 14-18 DDEA Module Assembly (Without MO Drive)

See Figure 14-21
1065-1946-05
2100-1324-01
2100-1517-01
See Figure 14-21
1516-0113
2950-1041-01 1065-1947-03
2950-1040-01
3100-1387-01 1541-0002
9903-0338-01
3600-0246-01
See Table 14-1 without ECG or MO Drive
Figure 14-19 DDEA Module Assembly (Without ECG, MO Drive and Physio)
See Figure 14-16 and Figure 14-17 1514-0060 1516-0076

for parent assembly
2950-1164-01
3500-1483-03
1539-0003
1560-0065
1065-5058-01
1065-2244-03
1065-4682-01
1541-0002
See Table 14-2 2275-0234-01
2100-1416-01 3600-0242-01
See Table 14-1 2100-1512-01
Figure 14-20 MO Drive (DDEA Module)

See Figure 14-18 and Figure 14-19 1514-0060 2208-0003

for parent assembly
1065-2997-01
1514-0060
3100-2383-01
1065-2951-02
3500-1851-01
1530-0269-01
3500-1482-03
1530-0269-01
See Table 14-1 2950-1039-01
Figure 14-21 Non MO Drive Connector Bracket (DDEA Module)

PCB locations
See Figure 13-2
A A A A A A A A A A A A A PS5 PS4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
See Figure 14-23

ON
OFF

SCSI
Compatibility Matrix for 2265-0056-02
part numbers 2275-0391-01
2275-0324-01
2275-0388-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-22 Card Cage, Rear

1
2
100-120 V∼ 3
50 Hz 4
1450 VA 5
6
7
Ac input module assembly

See Figure 11-4
See Figure 14-22
Circuit Breaker Switch
3100-2148-01 ACIM
2208-0143-01 (PS4)
2208-0144-01
3402-0026-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-23 AC Input Module Assembly

1530-0145-01
2950-0512-01
Power transformer assembly

2601-0052-06
2950-0613-01
1065-2498-02
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-24 Power Transformer Assembly

OEM transformer assembly

2601-0071-01 1065-2533-02
1543-0002
3700-0175-01
1065-3019-01
2950-0513-01
1516-0074
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-25 OEM Transformer Assembly

2950-0587-01
See Figure 14-28
See Figure 14-29 See Figure 14-27
Monitor assembly
3500-3040-05/06/07
3500-2532-15/16 2950-0586-01
3500-2532-16 1065-1789-08
1630-0098-01 1065-5131-02/03
1518-0051
1560-0051 1065-4691-02
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-26 Video Monitor Assembly

See Figure 14-26 for parent assembly

3500-2613-01
2275-0393-01
2100-1346-09 2405-0124-01
2100-1589-04 2950-1161-01
4600-0271-01
1630-0090-01
1065-4314-03
3500-2752-01
1565-0071-01 1065-4548-01
1530-0327-01
1560-0050
1562-0016
1065-4502-01
2208-0147-01
2100-1235-01
1065-4501-01
3500-2614-02
7500-1667-05
7500-1312-02
1065-4345-02
See Table 14-1 7500-1964-01
Figure 14-27 Video Monitor Chassis

3500-2614-02
1065-4317-02
7500-1313-03
1065-4233-03
1516-0074
1560-0061
1516-0113
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-28 Video Monitor Bezel

1065-4503-02
3500-2632-02
1065-4671-01
2100-1403-01
1065-4504-02
2950-1155-01
9901-0035
3500-2631-02
See Table 14-1 Microphone module assembly
Figure 14-29 Microphone Module Assembly

1065-2438-01 1530-0297-01
1065-2439-01
1065-2682-03
1065-2439-01
See Figure 14-31 1065-4565-03
1065-2372-04
1560-0051
1544-0012
1543-0002
3500-2812-03
See Table 14-1 Monitor tilt base assembly
Figure 14-30 Monitor Tilt Base Assembly


CAUTION
To prevent damage to the monitor, latches
must be in the locked position on both sides
of the monitor before moving the system.
Locked
Rod
Unlocked
3000-0363-04
1065-2682-03
Use a metal rod or a screwdriver to rotate 3000-0363-04

latch handle to lock or unlock latch. (Installed)
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-31 Monitor Tilt Base Latches

2208-0147-01
1630-0098-01
Slide
1065-2683-01 2100-0843-01
Panasonic
1065-1803-05
1065-3021-01 MD830 VCR
1630-0058-01
Microphone mounted with a VCR

See Table 14-1
Figure 14-32 VCR Support (Monitor)

1065-4264-02
1065-4263-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-33 Control Panel (Lock Bar)

Upper UIF assembly

3500-2955-xx
3500-2771-01 3500-2957-xx
3500-2959-xx
3500-2741-01 3500-2961-xx
2100-1480-03 3500-1563-01
3500-2770-01
3500-2639-01
Lower UIF assembly

3500-2954-xx
3500-2956-xx
3500-2958-xx
3500-2960-xx
3500-2962-xx 3500-2771-01
3500-2963-xx
3500-2964-xx
3500-2770-01
To IIM PCB
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-34 Control Panel (Upper and Lower UIF Assemblies)

1065-4260-02
See Figure 14-37
See Figure 14-38
3300-0307-01
3500-2639-01
1065-4260-02
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-35 Command Module

1518-0051
Cart Weldment
1065-4592-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-36 Cart Handle (Cart Weldment)

1543-0002
1530-0156-01
1065-2577-02
1065-2576-02
3500-2721-02
See Table 14-1 Cable clamp assembly
Figure 14-37 Cable Clamp Assembly (Command Module)


Inside of command module
1065-4626-03 1530-0027-01
3500-2741-01
3100-1387-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-38 Hand Controller Connector Bracket (Command Module)

3500-1857-01
4400-7006-11
The OEM Remote Tray Assembly

mounts to the underside of the Command 2100-1434-02
Module Housing. See Figure 14-40 2100-1435-02
2100-1370-03
2100-1369-02
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-39 Integrated Stress Echo Module and Accessories (ISEM)

1065-2975-01
1065-2903-06 1516-0113
1516-0005
1516-0074
See Figure 14-41
1517-0014 1518-0043
1560-0046
1530-0046-02
2208-0073
1065-2992-03
1561-0015 See Figure 14-41
1065-2907-04
1065-2991-02 2950-1066-01
1517-0061
3500-1856-03
See Table 14-1 OEM remote tray assembly
Figure 14-40 OEM Remote Tray Assembly (ISEM)


1516-0005
1516-0119
1560-0073
2950-0851-01
1065-2904-05
1065-2905-02
1065-2906-02
1516-0074
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-41 Tray Rod Detent (ISEM)

4100-0966-02
4100-1260-01
4100-1260-01
4100-1393-01
See Table 14-1
Figure 14-42 System Labels (1 of 5)

4100-0960-01
9903-0338-01
9903-0538-01
4100-1431-01
See Table 14-1

4100-1568-01
4100-0959-01
See Table 14-1

OEM remote tray 4100-1560-01

9903-0338-01
4100-0757-01
4100-0299
4100-0297
4100-0296
4100-1238-01
Footswitch 4100-0993-01 4100-1399-01
See Table 14-1

4100-0958-01 AC Input Module

4100-0942-02
4100-0943-02
4100-0944-02
4100-1387-01 4100-0945-01
9903-0578-01 ON
4100-0968-01
4100-1531-03
4100-1255-01
4100-0961-02 4100-1548-01
4100-0971-01
4100-1256-01
See Table 14-1

Parts: Parts List
Parts List
Table 14-1 HDI 3500 System Parts List
Located On Part Number Part Description Notes/Reference
Figure 14-30 1065-4565-03 Adapter, Monitor Height/Position
Figure 14-32 2100-0843-01 Adapter, Serial Interface, RS-232
Not shown 2301-0029-01 Adhesive, Bumper
Not shown 2301-0146 Adhesive, Sealant, Anaerobic, Med Str Used on DDEA assy
Figure 14-15 1065-2732-02 Air Deflector, Card Cage
Figure 14-5 2950-1148-01 Air Filter, Plastic
Figure 14-30 3500-2812-03 Base Assy, Tilt with Adapter
Figure 14-26 1065-1789-08 Base, HDI, Color Monitor
Figure 14-29 1065-4503-02 Base, Microphone Module
Figure 14-26 1065-5131-02/ Base, Monitor, with Machined Studs Alternate
03
Figure 14-30 1065-2682-03 Base, Tilt Mechanism, Fog
Figure 14-31
Figure 14-27 1065-4345-02 Beam, Mounting, Rear, Monitor
Figure 14-30 1065-2439-01 Bearing, Monitor Swivel
Figure 14-16 1065-4681-01 Bezel, DDEA
Figure 14-17
Figure 14-28 1065-4317-02 Bezel, Monitor, 15", Color
Figure 14-41 1065-2905-02 Block, Detent, Left
Figure 14-41 1065-2906-02 Block, Detent, Right
Parts: Parts List
Table 14-1 HDI 3500 System Parts List (Continued)
Figure 14-13 1519-0022 Bolt, 1/4-20 x 3/4, Hex, St, Zn
Figure 14-24 1530-0145-01 Bolt, 1/4-20 x 4-1/2, Hex, St, Zn
Figure 14-25 2950-0513-01 Bracket, Capacitor
Figure 14-21 1065-2997-01 Bracket, Connector, Disk Drive Module
Figure 14-27 1065-4314-03 Bracket, Controls, Monitor, 15-inch
Color
Figure 14-20 1065-5058-01 Bracket, Disk Drive, Optical
Figure 14-20 1065-2244-03 Bracket, Disk Drive, Optical,
Suspended
Figure 14-12 1065-2365-03 Bracket, Fan
Figure 14-7 1065-2954-01 Bracket, Mounting, Front Cover
Figure 14-9 1065-2255-06 Bracket, Mounting, Rear Cover
Figure 14-25 1065-3019-01 Bracket, Mounting, Transformer
Figure 14-40 1065-2903-06 Bracket, Mounting Tray
Figure 14-38 1065-4626-03 Bracket, Remote D-SUB
Figure 14-11 1065-5623-01 Bracket, Stud, Transceiver
Figure 14-11 1065-5622-01 Bracket, Transceiver Support
Not shown 1065-4980-01 Bracket, UIF, Ferrite
Figure 14-32 1065-1803-05 Bracket, VCR Mounting
Figure 14-32 1065-3021-01 Bracket, VCR Mounting, Hitachi systems
for Sony SVO-9500MD VCR
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-8 2950-0782-01 Brush, Antistatic
Figure 14-26 2950-0586-01 Bumper, 5DX.14H, Clr Vinyl, Adhesive
Back
Figure 14-2 1065-4695-01 Bumper Cap, Left
Figure 14-9 1065-4704-01 Bumper Cap, Rear, Dark Gray
Figure 14-2 1065-4694-01 Bumper Cap, Right
Figure 14-3 1065-4637-02 Bumper, Handle, Self-Adhesive, Dark
Gray
Figure 14-3 1065-5280-01 Bumper, Handle, with Clip Holes
Figure 14-2 3000-0681-02 Bumper, Side Strap, w/ext, Dark Gray fits extended frame
Figure 14-27 1065-4548-01 Button, Push, Monitor Control
Not shown 2208-0070 Cable Anchor, 3/4-in Sqr, 70 C, Adhv Secures
Back 3500-2614-xx cable
assy to bezel
Figure 14-37 3500-2721-02 Cable Clamp Assembly See Figure 10-5 for
details
Figure 14-4 3500-1834-01 Cable Drape Assy
Figure 14-40 1065-2991-02 Cable Retainer, OEM Remote Tray
Figure 14-40 2208-0073 Cable Strap, #8 Mount, 6-inch Long
Figure 14-21 2208-0003 Cable Tie, 3 7/8-in L, Ny
Figure 11-42 Table 11-35 Cables, Power Distribution
Figure 11-41 Table 11-34 Cables, Signal Interconnect
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-25 3700-0175-01 Cap, 30 µf, 660 VAC 10%, Xfmr Res
Paper
Figure 14-14 2950-1278-04 Caster Assy, Axle, Shock Absorbing Rear Axle
(Light Gray)
Figure 14-13 2950-0657-09 Caster Assy, Swivel, Brake Shock Front
Absorb (Light Gray)
Figure 14-13 2950-1389-02 Caster Assy, with Wheel Brake, Bumper Front
Gray (Dark Gray)
Figure 14-13 2950-1388-02 Caster Assy, Swivel/Lock, without Rear
Brake, Bumper Gray (Dark Gray)
Figure 14-13 2950-1278-03 Caster Assy, Swivel/Lock, without Rear
Brake, 6 Inch Diameter (Light Gray)
Figure 11-1 See the HDI Centerplane Assy Figure 11-5, pinout
Figure 14-15 3500 Master
Compatibility
Matrix
Not shown 2070-1981-01 Chip, SYSCPU ID, 6-Digit Requires specific MO
files to reflect the
machine ID number
Not shown 2208-0198-01 Clamp, CA, 0.187ID, 0.218 Mtg Hole,
ST
Not shown 2208-0199-01 Clamp, CA, 0.25ID, 0.218 Mtg Hole, ST
Not shown 1065-4800-01 Clamp, Cable, UIF
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-10 2950-1179-01 Clamp, Cable, 3/8D, 1/2W, 1/4 Screw, Power cord restrainer
Ins
Figure 14-3 1065-2370-02 Clamp, Cable, IIM See Figure 10-6 for
details
Figure 14-31 3000-0363-04 Clamp Lock Assy, Monitor
Figure 14-40 1065-2975-01 Clamp, Retaining, OEM Remote Tray
Figure 14-17 3100-0274 Connector, ECG, F6C See Table 13-2
Figure 14-21 3100-2383-01 Connector, Terminator, SCSI, Plug,
2x25
Figure 14-7 3500-1871-03 Cover Assy, Front
Figure 14-10 3500-1872-03/ Cover Assy, Rear
04
Figure 14-35 1065-4260-02 Cover, Command Module
Figure 14-16 1065-1947-03 Cover, Disk Drive Module
Figure 14-17
Figure 14-18
Figure 14-19
Figure 14-7 1065-2882-03 Cover, Front, Enclosure
Figure 14-29 1065-4504-02 Cover, Microphone Module
Figure 14-26 1065-4691-02 Cover, Monitor, 15-inch Color
Figure 14-10 1065-2892-04 Cover, Rear, Enclosure
Figure 14-28 1065-4233-03 Diffuser, Light, Monitor
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-18 2100-1445-01 Disk Drive, HD, 2.1 GB, SCSI Intfc Hard drive
Figure 14-16 2100-1517-01 Disk Drive, HD, 3.2 GB, SCSI-3, Intfc Hard drive
Figure 14-19
Figure 14-20 2100-0791-01 Disk Drive, 3.5-in, 128 MB, Optical
2100-0858-01 Disk Drive, 3.5-in, 230 MB, Optical
2100-1416-01 Disk Drive, 3.5-in, 640 MB, Optical
2100-1512-01 Disk Drive, 3.5-in, 640 MB, Optical, Fuj.
2100-1646-01 Disk Drive, 3.5-in, 640 MB, Optical, Fuj.
Figure 14-19 2100-1324-01 Disk Drive, HD, 1280 MB, SCSI Intfc Hard drive
Figure 14-17 3500-3066-03 Disk Drive, IBM HD Kit, 9.1 GB IBM See “To replace a
system hard drive:”
on page 334.
Figure 14-17 3500-3129-01 Disk Drive, HD, IBM, SCSI, Formatted Hard drive, See
(Part of HD replacement kit Table 13-3
3500-3066-03)
Parts: Parts List
See the HDI Disk Drive Module (DDEA), A1F See “Repairing DDEA
3500 Master Modules” on
Compatibility page 332.
Figure 14-17 Matrix Disk Drive Module Assy, Physio
Figure 14-18 Disk Drive Module Assy, Physio, No MO
Figure 14-16 Disk Drive Module Assy, without ECG
Figure 14-19 Disk Drive Module Assy, without ECG
or MO Drive
Figure 14-12 2100-0856-01 Fan, 24 Vdc, 120 CFM, 4.7 Inch Square Alternate
UL/CSA
Figure 14-12 2100-0839-01 Fan, 24 Vdc, 125 CFM, 4.7 Inch Square
UL/CSA
Figure 14-3 1065-5290-02 Fastener, Clip, Nylon, 0.25” Use 1 on each end of
bumper handle
Not shown 2604-0119-01 Ferrite Core/Case, 0.39D CA, Goes on
225z@100, PAL only 3500-2616-XX cable
assembly
Not shown 2604-0120-01 Ferrite Core/Case, 0.50D CA, Goes on
250z@100, PAL only 3500-2633-XX and
3500-2741-XX cable
assemblies
Not shown 2604-0121-01 Ferrite Core/Case, 0.25D CA,
275z@100, PAL only
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-23 3402-0026-01 Filter, Power, Line, 15 A, 250 V, Pnl Mt
Figure 14-7 1065-2973-01 Foam, Bottom, Footswitch Tray
Figure 14-1 3500-1535-01 Footswitch, 3-Position
Figure 14-1 3500-1730-01 Footswitch, 4-Position Alternate
Figure 14-16 3600-0246-01 Gasket, RFI, Finger Clip, BE-CU, 2.5-in
Figure 14-17
Figure 14-18
Figure 14-19
Figure 14-20 2275-0234-01 Ground Strap, Insul, 6.01 x 0.5 W
Figure 14-39 4400-7006-11 Hand Controller Fits on tray
Figure 14-36 1065-4592-01 Handle Casting
Figure 14-21 2950-1039-01 Handle, MO Drive Cover Plate, DDEA
Figure 14-40 1065-2992-03 Handle, OEM Remote Tray
Figure 14-29 2950-1155-01 Holder, Microphone
Figure 14-13 2950-1447-01 Hubcap, Caster, Bumper Gray Front and Rear
2 each caster
Figure 14-13 2950-0818-02 Hubcap, Front, Caster Assy 2 ea. caster
Figure 14-14 Hubcap, Rear, Axle Assy 1 ea. caster
Figure 14-29 1065-4671-01 Insert, Foam, Forward, Mic Module
Figure 14-39 2100-1434-02 ISEM, 3.0 Software, 3.5-in 540 MB MO The ISEM mounts to
Drive, 64 MB, NTSC the Universal OEM
Plate
Parts: Parts List
2100-1435-02 ISEM, 3.0 Software, 5.25-in MO Drive,
64 MB, NTSC
2100-1370-03 ISEM, 3.0 Software, 3.5-in 540MB MO
Drive, 32 MB, PAL
2100-1369-02 ISEM, 3.0 Software, 5.25-in MO Drive,
32 MB, PAL
Figure 14-20 2950-1164-01 Isolator, 3.1 Lb Min, 5 Lb Max Load
Figure 14-27 1065-4501-01 Isolator, Speaker, Monitor
Figure 14-24 2950-0613-01 Isolator, Vibration, Xfmr
Figure 14-13 1065-2611-02 Knob, Brake Lever
Figure 14-16 9903-0338-01 Label, 1.0 x 0.5, Plystr, Wht, Ammo-pak Behind Panel
Figure 14-17
Figure 14-18
Figure 14-19
Figure 14-43
Figure 14-45
Figure 14-45 4100-0299 Label, 2D/TM, 4000B, Footswitch
Figure 14-46 4100-0942-02 Label, ACIM Voltage, 100-120 V/60 Hz
Figure 14-46 4100-0943-02 Label, ACIM Voltage, 100-120 V/50 Hz
Figure 14-46 4100-0944-02 Label, ACIM Voltage, 230-240 V/50 Hz,
7.5A
Figure 14-46 4100-0945-01 Label, ACIM Voltage, 230 V/60 Hz,
7.5A
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-10 4100-1255-01 Label, ADAPTR
Figure 14-46
Figure 14-45 4100-0993-01 Label, Caution, PCB Removal
Figure 14-46 9903-0578-01 Label, China, CCIB Acceptance
Figure 14-46 4100-1531-03 Label, Chinese ID
Figure 14-10 4100-1256-01 Label, CPU
Figure 14-46
Figure 14-43 9903-0538-01 Label, DHHS Radiation Compliance,
1-7/8-in x 5/8-in, Domestic systems
only
Figure 14-45 4100-0757-01 Label, Footswitch, Water-resistant
Figure 14-45 4100-1399-01 Label, Frame OEM Upright, Dark Grey
Figure 14-45 4100-0296 Label, Freeze Frame,4000B, Footswitch
Figure 14-46 4100-0968-01 Label, Ground and AC Input
Figure 14-43 4100-1431-01 Label, MISEM Connector, Remote
Figure 14-42 4100-1260-01 Label, Monitor Latch Warning
Figure 14-46 4100-0958-01 Label, OEM Baseplate
Figure 14-7 4100-1548-01 Label, PCB Slot ID, 8.5 Located inside of
Figure 14-10 front cover, outside of
Figure 14-46 rear cover
Figure 14-10 4100-0961-02 Label, PIM
Figure 14-46
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-43 4100-0960-01 Label, Power Input, Monitor
Figure 14-45 4100-1238-01 Label, Right Side Cover
Figure 14-44 4100-0959-01 Label, SBY-ON, System
Figure 14-42 4100-0966-02 Label, System ID
Figure 14-46 4100-0971-01 Label, System Warning
Figure 14-45 4100-1560-01 Label, System, Year 2000 Compliance
Figure 14-45 4100-0297 Label, VCR, 4000B, Footswitch
Figure 14-42 4100-1393-01 Label, Warning, High Voltage
Figure 14-44 4100-1568-01 Label, Warning, Monitor Lock
Figure 14-10 4100-1387-01 Label, Warning, Power Cord
Figure 14-46
Figure 14-33 1065-4264-02 Latch, Lock Bar
Figure 14-27 2405-0124-01 LED, Green, T1, 4MCD, Clear, PCB
Figure 14-27 2950-1161-01 Lens, LED, 3MM, Green, Low Profile
Figure 14-33 1065-4263-01 Lock Bar, Control Panel
Figure 11-25 Table 11-24 Microphone Cable
Figure 14-29 2100-1403-01 Microphone Cartridge, Cond., Electret
Figure 14-29 3500-2631-02 Microphone Module Assy
Figure 14-27 2100-1589-04 Monitor, 15-in, Color, Open Chassis,
(FIMI)
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-27 2100-1346-09 Monitor, 15-in, Color, Open Chassis,
(Microvitek)
Figure 11-39 Table 11-34 Monitor Internal Cabling
Table 11-35
Figure 14-30 1544-0012 Nut, 1/4-20, Keps, St, Zn
Figure 14-20 1539-0003 Nut, 4-40, Keps, St, Zn
Figure 14-8
Figure 14-12
Figure 14-16
Figure 14-17
Figure 14-18
Figure 14-19
Figure 14-20
Figure 14-30
Figure 14-37
Figure 14-13 1065-5096-01 Nut Plate, Caster, Rear, Swivel
Figure 14-25 2601-0071-01 OEM Power Transformer, 350VA, 1 Pri/
2 Sec, Shielded
Figure 14-40 3500-1856-03 OEM Remote Tray Assy
Figure 14-8 1065-2386-01 OEM Strap, Universal See Figure 10-3 for
strap details
Parts: Parts List
Not shown 4100-1552-01 Overlay, Upper UIF English
Not shown 4100-1553-01 Overlay, Upper UIF French
Not shown 4100-1554-01 Overlay, Upper UIF German
Not shown 4100-1555-01 Overlay, Upper UIF Italian
Not shown 4100-1556-01 Overlay, Upper UIF Danish, Norwegian,
Swedish, Finnish
Figure 14-2 1065-4638-01 Pad, Foot Rest, Dark Gray
Figure 14-2 1065-2254-04 Panel, IIM Access
Figure 14-8
Figure 14-16 1065-1946-05 Panel, Mounting, Disk Drive Module
Figure 14-17
Figure 14-18
Figure 14-19
Figure 14-9 1065-4945-01 Panel, Rear, Dark Gray
Figure 14-6 1065-5222-01 Panel, Side, Left, Gen Imaging, Dark
Gray
Figure 14-6 1065-5224-01 Panel, Side, Left, CV Systems, Dark
Gray
Figure 14-6 1065-5221-02 Panel, Side, Right, Gen Imaging, Dark
Gray
Figure 14-6 1065-5223-02 Panel, Side, Right, CV Systems, Dark
Gray
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-22 See the HDI PCB Assy, Adv. Digital/Audio/ See Figure 13-2 for
3500 Master Physio and Translator (ADAPTR), A9B PCB locations.
Figure 14-22 Compatibility PCB Assy, Adv. IF Output Module See Figure 13-2 for
Matrix (AIFOM 2), A13B PCB locations.
Figure 14-22 PCB Assy, AC Input Module (ACIM), See Figure 11-4 or
Figure 14-23 PS4/PS5, 100-120 V/50 Hz See Figure 13-2 for
PCB Assy, AC Input Module (ACIM), PCB locations.
PS4/PS5, 100-120 V/60 Hz
PCB Assy, AC Input Module (ACIM),
PS4/PS5, 230 V/50 Hz
PCB Assy, AC Input Module (ACIM),
PS4/PS5, 230 V/60 Hz
Figure 14-15 PCB Assy, Analog Interface Module See Figure 13-1 for
(AIM), A5F PCB locations.
Figure 13-1 7500-1006-04 PCB Assy, Centerplane, Front
Figure 13-1 7500-1008-04 PCB Assy, Centerplane, Rear
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-15 See the HDI PCB Assy, Channel Boards (CB0-CB7), See Figure 13-1 for
3500 Master A7F-A14F PCB locations.
Figure 14-17 Compatibility PCB Assy, Disk Drive Module, with
Figure 14-18 Matrix Physio
Figure 14-16 PCB Assy, Disk Drive Module, without
Figure 14-19 ECG
Figure 14-15 PCB Assy, Doppler Acquisition See Figure 13-1 for
(DOPACQ), A6F PCB locations.
Figure 14-15 PCB Assy, Front End Controller (FEC), See Figure 13-1 for
A4F PCB locations.
Figure 14-22 PCB Assy, Image Memory (IMEM), 16 Mb x 2 SIMMS
A8B, 32 Mb See Figure 13-2 for
PCB locations.
Figure 14-22 PCB Assy, Image Memory (IMEM), 16 Mb x 4 SIMMS
A8B, 64 Mb See Figure 13-2 for
PCB locations.
Figure 14-22 PCB Assy, Internal Interface Module See Figure 13-2 for
(IIM), A1B PCB locations.
Figure 14-27 7500-1667-05 PCB Assy, Monitor Control
7500-1964-01 (use with FIMI)
Figure 14-27 7500-1312-02 PCB Assy, Monitor Control
(use with Microvitek)
Figure 14-28 7500-1313-03 PCB Assy, Monitor Light Bar
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-22 See the HDI PCB Assy, Peripheral Interface Module See Figure 13-2 for
3500 Master (PIM), A2B PCB locations.
Figure 14-22 Compatibility PCB Assy, Pixel Conversion Module See Figure 13-2 for
Matrix (PCM), A3B PCB locations.
Figure 14-22 PCB Assy, Pixel Space Processor 2 See Figure 13-2 for
(PSP2), A4B PCB locations.
Figure 14-22 PCB Assy, Pixel Space Processor See Figure 13-2 for
1(PSP1), A5B PCB locations.
Figure 14-15 PCB Assy, Power Supply Module See Figure 13-1 for
(PSM), PS2 PCB locations.
Figure 14-22 PCB Assy, Sample Space Processor See Figure 13-2 for
(SSP2), A11B PCB locations.
Figure 14-5 PCB Assy, Scanhead Select MUX See Figure 13-1 for
Figure 14-15 (S/HSEL) PCB locations.
Figure 14-22 PCB Assy, System CPU (SYSCPU), See Figure 13-2 for
A6B, 32 Mb PCB locations.
Not shown PCB Assy, User Interface Module (UIM) (Attaching parts)
1514-0083, screw
1560-0065, washer
Figure 14-41 2950-0851-01 Pin, Hitch, 0.07 Wire, 0.38/0.5 Shaft, St,
Figure 14-37 1065-2576-02 Plate, Cable Clamp, Left
Figure 14-37 1065-2577-02 Plate, Cable Clamp, Right
Figure 14-21 1065-2951-02 Plate, Cover, OD Drive, DDEA
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-30 1065-2372-04 Plate, Monitor Swivel
Figure 14-24 1065-2498-02 Plate, Nut, Transformer
Figure 14-25 1065-2533-02 Plate, Stud, Sinewave Transformer
Figure 14-8 1065-2385-04 Plate, Universal OEM
Figure 14-26 2950-0587-01 Plug, Hole, 0.562D, 1/8 Max, Pnl, Wht,
Nylon, without VCR
Figure 14-16 2950-1041-01 Plug, Hole, ECG, Painted
Figure 14-19
Figure 14-16 2950-1040-01 Plug, Hole, Physio, DDEA, Painted
Figure 14-19
Figure 14-23 2208-0143-01 Plug Lock, Inside, Detach Power Cord For 3100-2148-01
Figure 14-23 2208-0144-01 Plug Lock, Outside, Detach Power Cord For 3402-0026-01
Figure 14-8 2601-0052-06 Power Transformer Assy, Ferro-Res, 50-60 Hz
Figure 14-24 1200 VA, w/Shld
Figure 14-23 3100-2148-01 Receptacle, IEC, Male, 10A, Pnl/PCB
Figure 14-30 1065-2438-01 Ring, Clamping, Monitor Swivel
Figure 14-41 1065-2904-05 Rod, Detent, Tray
Figure 14-4 1065-2899-01 Rotor, Cable Manager
Figure 14-27 1630-0090-01 Screw, M4 x 6, Pnh, Pd, Int Sems, Ss,
Bo
Figure 14-32 1630-0058-01 Screw, M4 x 10, Pnh, Pd, Sems S/R Lk,
St, Zn
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-26 1630-0098-01 Screw, M5 x 12, Pnh, Pd, Int Sems, St,
Figure 14-32 Bo
Figure 14-13 1519-0034 Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/4, Pnh, Pd, St, Zn
Not shown 1514-0083 Screw, 4-40 x 1/4, Pnh, Sems, Pd, Ss Attaches User
Interface PCB Assy
Figure 14-38 1530-0027-01 Screw, 4-40 x 1/2, Flh, Pd, 82D, St, Wht
Figure 14-20 1514-0060 Screw, 4-40 x 3/8, Pnh, Sem,Pd,St,Zn
Figure 14-21
Figure 14-15 1563-0258-01 Screw, 6-32 x 0.88, Captive, HD, SS, Tn
Figure 14-40 1516-0005 Screw, 6-32 x 3/8, Pnh, Pd, St, Zn
Figure 14-41
Figure 14-12 1516-0074 Screw, 6-32 x 3/8, Pnh, Sem, Pd, St, Zn
Figure 14-25
Figure 14-28
Figure 14-40
Figure 14-41
Figure 14-21 1530-0269-01 Screw, 6-32 x 1/2, Flh, Pd, 100D, Ss,
Fogwhite
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-7 1516-0113 Screw, 6-32 x 1/2, Pnh, Sem, Pd, St, Zn
Figure 14-9
Figure 14-16
Figure 14-17
Figure 14-18
Figure 14-19
Figure 14-28
Figure 14-40
Figure 14-20 1516-0076 Screw, 6-32 x 5/16, Pnh, Int Sems, Pd,
Ss
Figure 14-27 1530-0327-01 Screw, 6-32 x 3/4, Pnh, Pd, Nylock, St,
Zn
Figure 14-41 1516-0119 Screw, 6-32 x 1-1/4, Pnh,Sem,Pd,St,Zn
Figure 14-40 1517-0061 Screw, 8-32 x 1/4, Pnh, Sems, Pd, St,
Zn
Figure 14-13 1530-0360-01 Screw, 8-32 x 3/8, Set, Hd, Flat, Pt, Zn Requires a 5/64” allen
wrench
Figure 14-40 1530-0046-02 Screw, 10-32 x 5/16, Pnh, Pd, St, Zn
Figure 14-2 1518-0051 Screw, 10-32 x 1/2, Pnh, Sem, Pd, St,
Figure 14-36 Zn
Figure 14-13 1530-0157-01 Screw, 10-32 x 5/8, Cap, Hd, Nylok, Zn
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-8
Figure 14-10
Figure 14-40
Figure 14-30 1530-0297-01 Screw, 10-32 x 1, Pnh, Pd, Sems, St,
Zn
Figure 14-37 1530-0156-01 Screw, 10-32 x 1, Flh, Pd, Fog White
Figure 14-16 3100-1387-01 Screwlock, 0.18-25H, 0.31L Stud, Pair
Figure 14-17
Figure 14-18
Figure 14-19
Figure 14-38
Figure 14-20 1065-4682-01 Seal, Support, MO Drive, DDEA
Figure 14-6 3500-1877-01 Shield Assy, Card Cage, Front Left
Figure 14-6 3500-1876-01 Shield Assy, Card Cage, Front Right
Figure 14-9 3500-1878-04 Shield Assy, Card Cage, Rear
Figure 14-20 3600-0242-01 Shield, Strip, Finger, 1.13x4.0 L
Figure 14-34 3500-1563-01 Slidepot Assy
Figure 14-40 2950-1066-01 Slides, No Lock, 3-Section, 17-in Travel, Come in pairs
Left/Right
Figure 14-17 1064-0130-02 Spacer, Connector, Plastic
Figure 14-18
Not shown 1065-2986-02 Spacer, Motherboard Assy
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-27 2100-1235-01 Speaker, 3.5-in, 8 Ohm, SHLD, 8 W, Ex,
Rng
Figure 14-27 4600-0271-01 Standoff, 6-32,1.0L,1/4Hex, F/F, Nylon
Figure 14-27 2208-0147-01 Standoff, Wire, 3/16, Push-in, Twist, Ny
Figure 14-32
Figure 14-4 1065-2901-01 Support, Cable Manager
Figure 14-32 1065-2683-01 Support, VCR
Figure 14-35 3300-0307-01 Switch, Rocker, Spst, 1A, 28V, Blk/Blk,
Pnl
Not shown 2604-0119-01 Tape, Velcro, 1-in W, Blk, Type 400, Secures ferrite core
3/4-in L on 3500-2614-xx
cable assy to monitor
Figure 14-24 2950-0512-01 Terminal Boot, Cap Insulator, Rubber
Figure 14-34 2100-1480-03 Trackball Assy, 480C/Rev, Rev, 2-inch
Sealed, Pnlmnt
Not shown 2100-1505-01 Trackball Upgrade Kit Contains trackball P/
N 2100-1480-02
Figure 8-1 2100-1657-01 Trackball Adjustment tool
Figure 14-7 1065-2953-01 Tray, Enclosure
Figure 14-40 1065-2907-04 Tray, OEM Remote
Figure 14-34 3500-2955-xx User Interface Assy, Upper (UCP) English
Figure 14-34 3500-2957-xx User Interface Assy, Upper (UCP) French
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-34 3500-2959-xx User Interface Assy, Upper (UCP) German
Figure 14-34 3500-2961-xx User Interface Assy, Upper (UCP) Italian
Figure 14-34 3500-2954-xx User Interface Assy, Lower (LCP) English
Figure 14-34 3500-2956-xx User Interface Assy, Lower (LCP) French
Figure 14-34 3500-2958-xx User Interface Assy, Lower (LCP) German
Figure 14-34 3500-2960-xx User Interface Assy, Lower (LCP) Italian
Figure 14-34 3500-2962-xx User Interface Assy, Lower (LCP) Danish
Figure 14-34 3500-2963-xx User Interface Assy, Lower (LCP) Norwegian
Figure 14-34 3500-2964-xx User Interface Assy, Lower (LCP) Swedish, Finnish
Figure 14-29 9901-0035 Velcro, Hook & Loop, Wht.1" Wd
Figure 14-26 3500-3040-05/ Video Monitor Assy, HDI 15-in Color,
06/07 (FIMI)
Figure 14-26 3500-2532-15/ Video Monitor Assy, HDI 15-in Color, Alternate
16 (Microvitek)
Figure 14-26 3500-2532-16 Video Monitor Assy, HDI 15-in Color,
(Microvitek)
Figure 14-39 3500-1857-01 Video Switch Assy Fits on tray
Figure 14-27 1560-0050 Washer, Flat, 0.17ID, 0.438OD, 0.032T,
St, Zn
Figure 14-27 1565-0071-01 Washer, Flat, 0.26ID, 0.5OD, 0.032T,
Nylon
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-20 1560-0065 Washer, Flat, #4, 0.122ID, 0.28OD,
0.03T,
Not shown 1560-0031 Washer, FIat, #6, 0.156ID, 0.38OD,
0.015T, SS
0.049T, St, Zn
Figure 14-28 1560-0061 Washer, Flat, #6, 0.312OD, 0.32T, St,
Zn
0.062T, Ny
Figure 14-5 1560-0051 Washer, Flat, #10, .203Id, .500D, .04T,
Figure 14-8 St, Zn
Figure 14-10
Figure 14-26
Figure 14-30
Figure 14-13 1560-0020 Washer, Flat, 1/4, .6250D, .065T, St, Zn
Figure 14-13 1561-0001 Washer, Internal Lock, 1/4, .4780D,
.025T
Figure 14-40 1561-0015 Washer, Internal Lock, #10, 0.38OD x
0.025T, St, Zn
Figure 14-27 1065-4502-01 Washer, Isolation, Speaker, Monitor
Figure 14-27 1562-0016 Washer, Shoulder, #6, 0.14ID, 0.17SD,
0.29OD, Ny
Parts: Parts List
Figure 14-13 2950-0857-01 Wheel, Axle Assy 2 ea. side
Figure 14-14 Wheel, Caster Assy 2 ea. caster
Figure 14-3 3500-2739-01 Wrist Support, Self-Adhesive, Dark
Gray
Table 14-2 HDI 3500 System Accessories Parts List

(Not Illustrated)
Part Number Part Description Notes/Reference
8500-9116-01 Kit, Accessory Tool Hitachi system
9905-0396-01 • Screwdriver, #1 Phillips, 3-1/8-in Shaft Hitachi system
9905-0397-01 • Screwdriver, 7/64” Ball Hex, 6-in Shaft Hitachi system
9903-0517-01 • Bag, Zipper, Ring Binder, 9.5-in x 6-in Hitachi system
2100-1419-01 Kit, Cleaning, Optical Drive, Fujitsu
8000-1682-01 Kit, Dependency 1512 MO Drive with Bracket
8000-1969-01 Kit, Dependency, 1646 MO Drive with Bracket
8000-2001-01 Kit, Dependency, IBM, Adapter, Clamp, Ops
8000-1900-01 Kit, Dependency, IBM Assembly and Clamp
8000-1462-01 Kit, New Dependency, Monitor Cover
8000-1366-01 Kit, Power Cord Cable Clamp
8000-1668-01 Kit, UIF Cable Clamps
2100-0792-01 Optical Disk, 3.5-in 128 MB (blank) Figure 14-20
Parts: Parts List
Table 14-2 HDI 3500 System Accessories Parts List
(Not Illustrated) (Continued)
Part Number Part Description Notes/Reference
2301-0700-01 Paint, Touch Up, Fog White, 1 oz Bottle
2301-0701-01 Paint, Touch Up, Fog White, 16 oz Aerosol
Table 14-3 Peripheral Part Numbers

Peripherals Description
(See Table 11-34 and Figure 11-41 for signal cables,
Location Table 11-35 and Figure 11-42 for power cables) Part Numbers OEM Set Ups
Color Video Printers
OEM Bay Color Printer, Sony UP-21MD, 120 V/230 V 2100-1852-01 Table 5-7
Figure 14-1
Color Printer, Mitsubishi, CP700, 120 V 3500-3071-011 Table 5-9
2100-1327-01
Color Printer, Mitsubishi, CP700, 240 V 3500-3072-011
2100-1328-01
Color Printer, Mitsubishi, CP800, 120 V 3500-3063-011 Table 5-11
2100-1535-01
Color Printer, Mitsubishi, CP800, 240 V 3500-3064-011
2100-1536-01
Parts: Parts List
Table 14-3 Peripheral Part Numbers (Continued)
Color Printer, Sony UP5600-60Hz, 155 Vac, 2100-0847-01 Table 5-8
NTSC
Color Printer, Sony UP5600-50 Hz, 155 Vac, 3500-1694-01
PAL
Black & White Video Printers
OEM Bay B&W Printer, Mitsubishi P91 W, 120 V/60 Hz, 2100-1680-01 Table 5-14
Figure 14-1 NTSC, 230 V/50 Hz, PAL Table 5-15
B&W Printer, Sony UP895, 120/230 V, NTSC/ 2100-1855-01 Table 5-13
PAL
B&W Printer, Sony UP890, 120/230 V, NTSC/ 2100-0862-01 Table 5-16
PAL (use either power cable)
B&W Printer, Sony UP910CE, Large Format, 2100-0759-01 Refer to OEM
240 V, 50 Hz, PAL Manual
B&W Printer, Sony UP910MD, 120 V, NTSC2 2100-0701-01 Refer to OEM
Manual
VCR
Figure 14-32 AGMD835E, VCR, RS232, 240 V, PAL 3500-3235-01 Refer to OEM
VCR Assy, SVHS, NTSC, HIFI, 120 V, RS-232 3500-1662-02 Manual
VCR Assy, SVHS, PAL, HIFI, 240 V, RS-232 3500-1663-01
AG-MD830P, VCR, NTSC, HIFI,120 Vac 2100-0785-02
AG-MD830P, VCR, PAL, HIFI, 240 Vac 2100-0829-01
Parts: Parts List
VCR, Sony SVO-9500MD 3500-1875-01
Network Printers
External Printer, Codonics NP1660MD, NetLink, North 2100-1566-01 Table 5-12
America
Printer, Codonics NP1660MD, NetLink, 2100-1567-01
International
Network Image Acquisition
OEM Bay Access Acquisition Module, 115 V, NTSC, 2100-7071-01 Refer to AAM
Figure 14-1 (Internal Installation) Service Manual
Access Acquisition Module, 115 V, NTSC, 2100-7071-01 4730-7070-01b.
(External Installation) pdf
Cameras
External Aspect MIC Camera, 120 V, NTSC, English 3500-1664-01 Table 5-17
Aspect MIC Camera, 240 V, PAL, English 3500-1665-01 Table 5-17
Aspect MIC Camera, 240 V, PAL, French 3500-1671-01
Aspect MIC Camera, 240 V, PAL, German 3500-1667-01
Integrated Stress Echo Module
OEM Bay ISEM, 3.5-in/64 Mb, NTSC 2100-1434-02 Refer to ISEM
Figure 14-1 Service Manual
ISEM, 5.25-in/64 Mb, NTSC 2100-1435-02 4730-7017-04
Parts: Parts List
ISEM, 3.5-in/32 Mb, PAL 2100-1370-03
ISEM, 5.25-in/32 Mb, PAL 2100-1369-02
Page Printers
External LED Pg Printer, Okidata OL400e, 120 V, Ext. 2100-0866-01 Refer to OEM
manual
1. 3500-XXXX is the 2100-XXXX printer with feet.
Scanheads: Scanheads
15 Scanheads
Scanheads Table 15-1 contains the scanhead name that appears on the display when selected, the
label on the scanhead, the scanhead frequency, the Doppler frequency, and the 2D Pen-
etration at the default TSI setting.
Table 15-2 contains scanhead part numbers and compatibility information.
Table 15-3 lists the biopsy guides available for each scanhead.
Table 15-4 contains a summary of clinical options and TSI settings.
Table 15-5 is a table of PW maximum measurable velocity (MMV) for each scanhead.
Table 15-6 is a table of CW maximum measurable velocity (MMV) for each scanhead.
Table 15-1 Scanhead Information
Operating Doppler Penetration
Scanhead Name Scanhead Label Frequency Frequency (2D min)
L7-4 38 mm Linear Array L7-4 7.0 - 4.0 MHz 4.0 MHz 6.3 cm
LI9-5 Linear Array LI9-5 9.0 - 5.0 MHz 5.0 MHz 5.0 cm
LAP L9-5 Linear Array LI9-5 9.0 - 5.0 MHz 6.0 MHz 5.0 cm
C3.5 76 mm Curved Array C3.5 3.5 MHz 3.0 MHz 10.0 cm
C4-2 40 mm Curved Array C4-2 4.0 - 2.0 MHz 2.5 MHz 11.5 cm
Table 15-1 Scanhead Information (Continued)
Operating Doppler Penetration
Scanhead Name Scanhead Label Frequency Frequency (2D min)
C5 IVT 11 mm Curved Array C5 IVT 5.0 MHz 4.0 MHz 5.5 cm
C8-4v 11 mm Curved Array C8-4v 8.0 - 4.0 MHz 5.0 MHz 5.5 cm
C8-5 Curved Array C8-5 8.0 - 5.0 MHz 5.0 MHz 5.2 cm
C9-5 ICT 8 mm Curved Array C9-5 9.0 - 5.0 MHz 5.0 MHz 5.2 cm
CL10-5 Compact Linear CL 10-5 10.0 - 5.0 MHz 6.0 MHz 3.2 cm
CT8-4 40 mm Curved Array CT8-4 8.0 - 4.0 MHz 6.0 MHz 5.8 cm
P3-2 20 mm Phased Array P3-2 3.0 - 2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz 12 cm
P4-2 20 mm Phased Array P4-2 4.0 - 2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz 12 cm
P5-3 16 mm Phased Array P5-3 5.0 - 3.0 MHz 3.0 MHz 9.5 cm
P7-4 8 mm Phased Array P7-4 7.0 - 4.0 MHz 4.0 MHz 6.0 cm
MPT7-4 Phased Array MPT7-4 7.0 - 4.0 MHz 4.0 MHz 6.0 cm
BPT9-5 Phased Array BPT9-5 9.0 - 5.0 MHz 6.0 MHz 4.5 cm
TCD Static D2 TC 2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz
D2 Static D2 CW 2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz
Table 15-2 Scanhead Matrix

Dash Number
Scanhead Type Part Bkwd No. Biopsy Hardware 4
S/W
1 2
Scanhead Name Number Current Comp. EMC Elem. Guide3 Notes Comp.
PHASED ARRAY
P3-2 20 mm 4000-0287 04 03/02 04 64 N 150.23
P4-2 20 mm 4000-0660 02 - 02 64 Y 150.23
P5-3 16 mm 4000-0316 05 04/03/ 05/04 64 Y 150.23
02
P7-4 8 mm 4000-0322 03 02/01 03/02 64 Y 150.23
MPT7-4 4000-0317 16 09/08/ - 64 N 150.23
07/04/
03
BPT9-5 4000-0420 01 - 01 2x64 N 150.23
LINEAR ARRAY
L7-4 4000-0318 09 08/07/ 07/06/ 128 Y 150.23
06/ 05/ 05
04
LAP L9-5 4000-0658 04 - - 128 N 150.23
LI9-5 4000-0408 01 - - 128 N 150.23
L10-5 38 mm 4000-0263 06 05/03/ - 192 Y 150.23
02
L10-5 38 mm 4000-0333 02 01 02 192 Y 150.23
Table 15-2 Scanhead Matrix (Continued)
Dash Number
S/W
1 2
L12-5 38 mm 4000-0396 06 05/04 05/06 192 Y 150.23
L12-5 50 mm 4000-0762 05 04/03 04/05 256 Y 150.23
CL10-5 4000-0315 06 05/04/ 05/04 128 N 150.23
03/02/0
CURVED ARRAY
C3.5 76R 4000-0256 07 06/05/ - 128 Y 150.23
04
C4-2 40R 4000-0320 07 06/05/ 03 128 Y 150.23
03/02
C5-2 40R 4000-0574 03 02/01 - 128 Y 150.23
C5 IVT 4000-0260 05 04 05 114 Y 150.23
C7-4 40R 4000-0301 07 06/05/ 03 128 Y 150.23
03/02
C8-4v 11 mm 4000-0409 02 - 02 128 Y 150.23
CT8-4 40 mm 4000-0390 04 03/02 - 128 N 150.23
C8-5 14 R 4000-0676 01 Y 151.09
C8~5 4000-0800 02 Y 151.09
C9-5 ICT 4000-0280 16 01-03, 12/11/ 128 Y 150.23
08, 10/09
10-15
Table 15-2 Scanhead Matrix (Continued)
Dash Number
S/W
1 2
STATIC CW
D2 TC 4000-0310 02 01 02 2 N 150.23
D2 CW 4000-0307 05 04 04/05 2 N 150.23
D5 CW 4000-0308 02 - 02 2 N 150.23
D10 CW 4000-0309 02 - 02 2 N 150.23
1. The “Bkwd Comp.” column lists dash numbers that are backward compatible with the listed scanhead.
2. The “EMC” column lists dash numbers of scanheads that may be ordered worldwide (must use EMC scanheads for
Europe). Non-EMC scanheads may be ordered for domestic U.S. and other countries.
3. Indicates biopsy guide availability. Check paragraph for part numbers.
4. The “S/W Comp.” column lists the minimum software build level required for use of the listed scanhead.
Table 15-3 Scanhead Biopsy Guides
Dash Bkwd. Fwd. Hardware S/W2

1
Biopsy Guide Part No. No. Comp. Comp. Notes Comp.
Biopsy Guide Kit, 8000-1622 01 150.23
P4-2
Biopsy Guide Kit, 8000-1526 01 150.23
P5-3
Biopsy Guide Kit, 8000-1527 01 150.23
P7-4
Table 15-3 Scanhead Biopsy Guides (Continued)

Biopsy Guide Part No. No. Comp.1 Comp. Notes Comp.
Biopsy Guide 1065-1910 02 150.23
Bracket L7-4, 38
mm, 5 MHz
Biopsy Guide 1065-1908 02 150.23
Bracket L10-5, 38
mm, 7.5 MHz
Biopsy Guide Kit 2950-1211 01 150.23
L12-5, 38 mm
Biopsy Guide Kit 8000-1619 02 150.23
L12-5, 50 mm
Biopsy Guide 1065-1907 02 150.23
Bracket C3.5, 76R,
3.5 MHz
Biopsy Guide 1065-1909 02 150.23
Bracket C4-2 40R/
C5-2 40R/C7-4
Biopsy Guide 1065-1811 02 No longer sold. 150.23
Bracket, C9-5 ICT Supplies still
available.
Biopsy Guide 8075-0580 02 150.23
Bracket, C5 IVT
Table 15-3 Scanhead Biopsy Guides (Continued)

Biopsy Guide Part No. No. Comp.1 Comp. Notes Comp.
Universal Biopsy 1065-2608 04 03, 02, 150.23
Guide, C9-5 ICT 01
Biopsy Guide Kit, 8000-1304 01 150.23
C8-4v 1065-2731 01
Biopsy Guide Kit, 1065-4585 01 150.23
C8-5
1. The “Bkwd Comp.” column lists dash numbers that are backward compatible with the listed scanhead.
2. The “S/W Comp.” column lists the minimum software build level required for use of the listed scanhead.
Table 15-4 Scanhead Clinical Options and TSI

2D Flow
Type Clinical Options Opt. Opt. Tissue Specific Imaging (TSI)
Linear array
L7-4 40 mm Small Parts X X Thyroid, Testicle, Breast, Superficial
Cerebrovascular X Carotid, Vertebral
Peripheral Vasc X Arterial, Venous, Graft
Musculoskeletal X Shoulder, Knee
Pediatric X X Ped Hip
Advanced Breast X X General
Generic X General
Table 15-4 Scanhead Clinical Options and TSI (Continued)
2D Flow
Cerebrovascular X Carotid, Vertebral
Musculoskeletal X Shoulder, Knee, Elbow/Wrist, Hand/
Foot, Superficial
Pediatric X X Neo Abd, Neo Hip, Neo Renal
Advanced Breast X General
Generic X X General
L12-5 38 mm Small Parts X X Thyroid, Testicle, Breast (no 2D Opt),
Superficial
Cerebrovascular X X Carotid, Vertebral
Peripheral Vasc X X Arterial, Venous, Graft
Musculoskeletal X X Shoulder, Knee, Elbow/Wrist, Hand/
Foot, Superficial
Generic X X General
Cerebrovascular X X Carotid, Vertebral
Peripheral Vasc X X Arterial, Venous, Graft
2D Flow
Musculoskeletal X X Shoulder, Knee, Elbow/Wrist, Hand/
Foot, Superficial
Generic X X General
CL10-5 Small Parts X Superficial
Cerebrovascular X Carotid
Peripheral Vasc X Graft
Musculoskeletal X Shoulder, Knee Elbow/Wrist, Hand/
Foot, Superficial
Pediatric X Neo Abd, Neo Renal
Neurosurgery X Crani, AVM, Spine
Vascular X Vascular
Adult Card Superficial
Generic General
Curved Array
C3.5 76 mm OB X General, Fetal Echo
Gyn/Fertility X Pelvic
Generic X General
C4-2 Abdomen X X General, Renal, Aorta, Transplant
2D Flow
OB X X General, Fetal Echo
Gyn/Fertility X X Pelvic
General Imaging/CSI X X 2D Harmonic, Power Harmonic®
Abdomen with THI X X General, Renal, Aorta, Transplant
OB with THI X X General, Fetal Echo
Gyn/Fertility with THI X X Pelvic
Generic X X General
General Imaging/CSI X X 2D Harmonic, Power Harmonic
Abdomen with THI X X General, Renal, Aorta, Transplant
OB with THI X X General, Fetal Echo
Gyn/Fertility with THI X X Pelvic
Generic X X General
Generic X X General
C8-4v OB X X General, Fetal Echo
2D Flow
Generic X X General
C8-5 Small Parts X Superficial
Pediatric X Neo Abd, Neo Renal, Neo Hip, Neo
Pelvic, Cephalic
Neurosurgery X Crani, AVM, Spine
OB X General
Pediatric Card Neonatal
Generic X X General
C9-5 Prostate X Prostate
OB X General, Fetal Echo
Gyn/Fertility X Pelvic
Generic X General
C5 IVT OB General, Fetal Echo
Gyn/Fertility Fertility, Pelvic
Generic X X General
Phased Array
P3-2 Abdomen X X General, Aorta
2D Flow
TCD X TCD
Adult Card General, Difficult
Pediatric Card General
Card CSI 2D Harmonic, Power Harmonic
X Power Harmonic 2
Adult Card with THI General
Generic X General
P4-2 Abdomen X X General, Aorta
TCD X TCD
Adult Card X General
Card CSI X 2D Harmonic, Power Harmonic (no 2D
Opt)
X Power Harmonic 2
Adult Card with THI X General
Generic X X General
2D Flow
P5-3 Abdomen X X General
Pediatric X Ped Abd
Adult Card General, Difficult
Generic X General
P7-4 Pediatric X X Ped Abd, Cephalic, Ped Renal
OB X X Fetal Echo
Pediatric Card General, Neonatal
Adult Card General
Neurosurgery X X AVM, Crani
Generic X X General
Surgical
CT8-4 Abdominal Surgery X X General
Generic X X General
Li 9-5 Abdominal Surgery X X Superficial
Generic X X General
Lap L9-5 Abdominal Surgery X X General, Superficial
2D Flow
Generic X X General
Transesophageal
MPT 7-4 TEE X X TEE
Generic X X General
BPT 9-5 TEE Pediatric, Neonatal
Generic X X General
Static Probes
D2 TC TCD TCD
Generic General
D5 CW Cerebrovascular • Carotid, Vertebral
Peripheral Vascular • Arterial, Venous
Generic • General
D10 CW Peripheral Vascular • Arterial, Venous
Generic • General
D2 CW Adult Card • General
Pediatric Card • General
Generic • General
Table 15-5 PW Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities

(MMV)
Doppler Freq. Angle Correction MMV
Scanhead (MHz) (degrees) (meters/sec)
BPT9-5 6.0 0 3.50
C3.5 76 mm 3.0 0 5.80
C4-2 40 mm 2.5 0 7.00
C5-2 40 mm 2.5 0 7.00
C5 IVT 4.0 0 4.40
C8-4v IVT 5.0 0 3.50
C8-5 14R 5.0 0 3.50
C7-4 40 mm 4.0 0 4.40
C9-5 ICT 6.0 0 3.50
CL10-5 6.0 0 2.90
CT8-4 4.0 0 4.40
D2 TCD 2.0 0 8.80
L7-4 38 mm 4.0 0 4.40
LI9-5 33 mm 6.0 0 2.90
L10-5 38 mm 6.0 0 2.90
L12-5 38 mm 6.0 0 2.90
MPT7-4 4.0 0 4.40
P3-2 20 mm 2.0 0 8.80
P4-2 20 mm 2.0 0 8.80
Table 15-5 PW Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities
(MMV) (Continued)
P5-3 16 mm 3.0 0 5.80
P7-4 11 mm 4.0 0 4.40
Table 15-6 CW Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV)

BPT9-5 4.0 0 8.0
D2 CW 2.0 0 16.0
D5 CW 5.0 0 6.40
D10 CW 10.0 0 3.20
MPT7-4 4.0 0 8.0
P3-2 20 mm 2.0 0 16.0
P4-2 20 mm 2.0 0 16.0
P5-3 16 mm 3.0 0 10.70
P7-4 11 mm 4.0 0 8.0
Glossary: Acronyms and Abbreviations
16 Glossary
Acronyms
and
Abbreviations
4V2 Peak pressure gradient
A Amperes
A1B A1B-A13B identify card cage slot positions
AC Alternating current
ACIM AC Input Module (main power input panel)
A/D Analog-to-digital conversion
ADAPTR Advanced Digital, Audio, Physio, and Translator
(module)
AIFOM Advanced IF Output Module
AIM Analog Interface Module
Amps Amperes
AP&I Acoustic Power and Intensity
APS Analog Power Supply
AQ Acquisition (bus)
AQ Bus Acquisition Bus
Assy Assembly
AT Acceleration time; averaging time
B/W Black and white
CB, Ch Bd Channel Board
CAM Combined Acquisition Mode
Cap Capacitor
CFM Cubic feet per minute
COMP IMG Compound Imaging (Spatial compounding, SonoCT®)
Conn Connector
CPA Color Power Angio
CPI Control Panel Interface (module)
CPU System CPU (system controller module)
CRE Contrast Resolution Enhancement (freq. compounding)
CSI Contrast Specific Imaging
D Diameter
D/A Digital-to-analog
DC Direct current
DCE Dynamic Contrast Enhancement (frame averaging)
DDEA Disk Drive, ECG, and Audio (module)
DOPACQ Doppler Acquisition (module)
DPS Digital Power Supply

DRF Dynamic Receive Focusing
DT Deceleration time
ECG Electrocardiograph
EDF End diastolic velocity and frequency
ESP Extended Signal Processing
FEC Front End Controller (module)
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
Fl Flat
Flh Flathead
FNDE Fender washer
FOOTSW Footswitch
F/W Firmware
GB Gigabyte
H High
Hd Hex drive
HD ZOOM High Definition ZOOM (Ultrasound image enlargement)
Hosp Hospital
HPRF High Pulse Repetition Frequency
HR Heart rate
HVAC High voltage alternating current

HVDC High voltage direct current
H/W Hardware
Hz Hertz
ID Inside diameter (screws or hardware) or system identifi-
cation number
IF Intermediate frequency
IIM Internal Interface Module
IMEM Image Memory (module)
Ins Inside
Int Internal
ISEM Integrated Stress Echo Module
L Long or length
lb Pound
lb/min Pound per minute
LCP Lower Control Panel (module)
LED Light emitting diode
LEP List of Effective Pages
Lk Lock
LUT Look-up table
LVD Low Velocity Detection

Max Maximum
MB Megabyte
MDF Minimum diastolic velocity and frequency
MO Magneto-optical (drive) or machine option (files)
MON Monitor
MOP Module Operations Processor
MPS Master Power Supply
Mt Mounting
Mux Multiplexer
NTSC National Television Standards Committee (video stan-
dard)
Ny Nylon
OD Outside diameter
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer, peripheral device
such as a printer, VCR, or camera
OSP On-screen programming
Oz Ounces
PAL Phased Alteration by Line (European video standard)
PCHI Power Contrast Harmonic Imaging
PCM Pixel Conversion Module
PD Processed Data (bus) or Phillips drive (screw)

PHI Power Harmonic Imaging
PI Pulsatility index
PIH Pulse Inversion Harmonic
PIM Peripheral Interface Module
PLL Phase loop locking
PMI Power Motion Imaging
Pnh Pan head
Pnl Panel
Plystr Polyester
Ppr Paper (capacitor)
PRF Pulse repetition frequency
PRI Pulse repetition interval
PS1 PS1-PS4 identify card cage slot positions
PSP1, PSP2 Pixel Space Processor (module)
PSF Peak systolic frequency
PSV Peak systolic velocity
RF Radio frequency
RFI Radio frequency interference
RI Resistive index
Rkr Rocker (switch)

Rx Receive or receiver
SBY Standby
SC System Control (Interface Processor)
SCIP System Control Interface Processor
SCSI Small Computer Serial Interface
S/D Systolic/diastolic ratio
S/H Scanhead
Shld Shield or shielded
S/HSEL Scanhead Select (module)
Skh Socket head
Spst Single pole, single throw switch
SS Stainless steel
SSP Sample Space Processor (module)
St Steel
S-VHS Super VHS, a VCR video format
Sw Switch
S/W Software
T Thick
TAF Time-averaged frequency
TAM Time-averaged mean velocity

TAP Time-averaged peak velocity
TDI Tissue Doppler Imaging
TGC Time gain compensation
THI Tissue Harmonic Imaging
TOC Table of Contents
TSI Tissue Specific Imaging
TSP Tissue Specific Presets
TTag Time Tag (bus)
Tx Transmit or transmitter
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter
UCP Upper Control Panel (module)
UIF User interface (LCP, UCP, and CPI)
Unshld Unshielded
VA Volt amps
Vac Volts AC
Vdc Volts DC
VTI Velocity-time integral
V+V Velocity + Variance
Glossary: Terms
W Wide (refers to a distance measurement) or watt (unit of

electrical power)
w/ with
Wht White
w/o without
Xfmr Transformer
Zn Zinc
ZOOM Video display is enlarged (spatially)
Terms
Artifact An undesirable imaging anomaly created as the result
of acoustic effects or system processing.
Box An image made up of a sequential set of columns that
is usually smaller than the sector size would allow.
Most commonly refers to the color flow image color
box.
Burst The transmitted waveform.
Drain In a coaxial or shielded cable, a wire that is in contact
with the shield's braid or foil for the length of the cable.
It is used to make the mechanical attachment and
consequently the electrical path from the shield to the
connector or plug.
Glossary: Terms
Fast Fourier Mathematical method used with Doppler shift data to

Transformation calculate the frequency spectrum that results in the
Doppler display.
Interlaced Video format where two fields make up one 30 Hz
frame. Video rows (scan lines) of the raster are inter-
laced; that is, field one provides rows 1, 3, 5, and so
on, then field two fills in rows 2, 4, 6, and so on. See
“non-interlaced.”
Module Board-level microprocessor dedicated to carrying out
Operations the functions of its hardware module. Communicates
Processor with the system CPU via a SCIP bus. Typically runs
tasks such as initialization of registers, self-test, inter-
preting commands from the System CPU, and orches-
trating real-time tasks on the hardware module.
Noise band Any level of random background noise when the sys-
tem speaker (not headphone) volume is set for a typi-
cal user setting (generally just above a mid-range
setting).
Also, any regular line or trace that clearly appears in
the scrolling display (as three pixels per inch or more)
at a level that is greater than the background noise.
Non-interlaced Video format where the video rows are processed in
sequence (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and so on) and updated at a
60 Hz rate. See “interlaced.”
National 525-line, 60Hz, composite video, usually color.
Television
Standards
Committee
Glossary: Terms
Original A peripheral device (VCR, printer, camera).

Equipment Manu-
facturer
On-screen Refers to on-screen programming of a VCR, or other
programming OEM device.
Phased Alteration 625-line, 50Hz composite video, usually color.
by Line
Pulse repetition Rate at which ultrasound pulses are sent into the tis-
frequency sue. Based primarily on depth desired, but also
depends on other variables such as dead time.
Pulse repetition The time between ultrasound pulses. This time deter-
interval mines how much processing can take place and still
keep up with the data acquisition.
System Control Set of processors that reside on all modules that com-
Interface municate with the CPU PCB. SCIP refers to the com-
Processor munication system, which includes protocol, firmware,
and hardware.
Universal Serial communication port located on the card edge of
Asynchronous the FEC. Also called debug port or diagnostic port.
Receiver
Transmitter Port
Watchdog A level detector, a comparator circuit, or a time-out cir-
cuit, that ensures the proper functioning of a supply, a
regulator, or other circuitry. Disables the monitored cir-
cuit if it is out of specification or the timer is not reset.
Glossary: Terms

Service Manual Hdi 3500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Hdi 3500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

About This

Field Service Manual

All rights reserved

Copyright © 2002 by Philips Medical Systems

Conventions in The following conventions are used in this manual:

Lower user interface

Optical disk drive Peripheral bay

Card cage and

Figure 1-1 HDI 3500 System (Front)

Figure 1-2 HDI 3500 System (Rear)

Phone: (800) 445-6741, Ex. 1 for Customer Service (USA)

Electrical and • Power:

Water-proof appliance (scanheads only). This instrument may be safely

Identifies equipotential ground (located next to ground stud on the rear

The following symbols are also used on the system:

Operating The software operating system is supported by X-Windows software. X-Windows is an

Control Power All modules

RF Bus Image Bus

Figure 4-1 System Block Diagram

Power Distribution Group

Figure 4-2 Power Subsystem

Power Subsystem Operation

WARNING HVDC is present on the Centerplane in STANDBY.

ON/STANDBY switch remains in STANDBY. Power supplies on: no power to card

Figure 4-3 ACIM Module

Power Supply Module (PSM) - PS1, PS2, PS3

User Interface (UIF) IIM PCM Acquisition

CPU SC Bus Processing

Figure 4-4 Control Subsystem Block Diagram

System CPU (CPU) - A8B (32 MB)

Image Memory (IMEM) - A6B

• Stores Cineloop® frames.

Disk Drive, ECG, and Audio (DDEA) - A1F

Footswitch Footswitch PCM

Figure 4-5 Acquisition Subsystem

Front End Controller (FEC) - A4F

Channel Boards (CB) A7F - A10F

A7F - A10F Summing Bus

Figure 4-6 Channel Boards

Analog Interface Module (AIM) - A5F

Doppler Acquisition (DOPACQ) - A6F

Scanhead Select Module (S/HSEL)

AIFOM ADAPTR Image

Figure 4-7 Processing Subsystem

Advanced Intermediate Frequency Output Module (AIFOM) - A12B

Advanced Digital Audio, Physio, and Translator Module

Upper Lower Internal

Figure 4-8 Display Subsystem

Pixel Conversion Module (PCM) - A3B

Peripheral Interface Module (PIM) - A2B

Internal Interconnect Module (IIM) - A1B

Figure 4-9 2D Black and White Signal Path

Figure 4-10 PW Doppler, M-Mode and Color Path

DDEA Ext. IMEM

Figure 4-11 CW and Static PW Doppler (TCD) Signal Path

Figure 4-12 Internal/External VCR Frame Grab Signal Path

External Live Video

* These connections are located on rear of the system.

Figure 4-13 External VCR Playback Signal Path

* These connections are located on the rear of the system.

Figure 4-14 External VCR Record Signal Path

PSM Pulser AIM (HV Out) Channel Boards

Figure 4-15 Power Monitor Block Diagram